TWI524873B - Intraocular photography display system - Google Patents

Intraocular photography display system Download PDF

Info

Publication number
TWI524873B
TWI524873B TW100147322A TW100147322A TWI524873B TW I524873 B TWI524873 B TW I524873B TW 100147322 A TW100147322 A TW 100147322A TW 100147322 A TW100147322 A TW 100147322A TW I524873 B TWI524873 B TW I524873B
Authority
TW
Taiwan
Prior art keywords
image
dentition
display
tooth
data
Prior art date
Application number
TW100147322A
Other languages
Chinese (zh)
Other versions
TW201236636A (en
Inventor
Nobuchika Urakabe
Original Assignee
Advance Co Ltd
Priority date (The priority date is an assumption and is not a legal conclusion. Google has not performed a legal analysis and makes no representation as to the accuracy of the date listed.)
Filing date
Publication date
Priority claimed from JP2011017192A external-priority patent/JP2012143528A/en
Priority claimed from JP2011144612A external-priority patent/JP2013012062A/en
Application filed by Advance Co Ltd filed Critical Advance Co Ltd
Publication of TW201236636A publication Critical patent/TW201236636A/en
Application granted granted Critical
Publication of TWI524873B publication Critical patent/TWI524873B/en

Links

Landscapes

  • Dental Tools And Instruments Or Auxiliary Dental Instruments (AREA)
  • Endoscopes (AREA)

Description

口腔內攝影顯示系統Intraoral photography display system

本發明係關於一種對整個口腔內進行拍攝而全景顯示之系統。The present invention relates to a system for photographing a panoramic view of the entire oral cavity.

關於蛀牙等口腔內疾病之治療,大多係若所需治療結束則門診治療亦結束。蛀牙之治療大多係患者感覺到牙疼、不適感等症狀後開始,模式大多為治療結束則門診治療亦結束,故以外即便有蛀牙但無自覺症狀時,則放置不管,蛀牙嚴重後才進行門診治療之例子較多。Regarding the treatment of oral diseases such as cavities, most of the outpatient treatments are completed if the required treatment is over. The treatment of tooth decay is mostly started after the patient feels the symptoms such as toothache and discomfort. The mode is mostly the end of the treatment, and the outpatient treatment is also finished. Therefore, even if there is tooth decay but no symptoms, it will be placed regardless of the tooth decay. There are many examples of treatment.

又,於此種短暫性之門診治療中,既未謀求整個口腔內之健全化,且本人大多情形時並不知曉污垢、腫脹、缺損、牙垢、磨損、涎石、異常等雖無自覺症狀但可自外部觀察到的症狀。In addition, in this kind of transient outpatient treatment, the entire oral cavity is not sought to be perfected, and in many cases, I do not know that dirt, swelling, defects, tartar, abrasion, meteorites, abnormalities, etc., although there are no symptoms, Symptoms that can be observed from the outside.

對於牙科醫業之經營來說,有時單次治療之收益性並不一定良好,但未找到解決之較佳手段。For the operation of the dental industry, sometimes the benefit of a single treatment is not necessarily good, but no better means of solving it.

於日本特開平10-97404中表示有一種電子病歷之構成:藉由將整個齒列顯示於電腦螢幕上,對各個齒附加著色,使患者亦容易觀察。A composition of an electronic medical record is shown in Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 10-97404: by displaying the entire dentition on a computer screen, coloring is applied to each tooth so that the patient can easily observe it.

齒列之易觀察性為知情同意書中亦要求之必要條件,即便在容易觀察整個齒列之一部分之狀態下,為了用於治療之說明,亦需要進而放大,以理解其治療目的之構成。The easy-to-observe nature of the dentition is a necessary condition in the informed consent form. Even in the state where it is easy to observe a part of the entire dentition, in order to be used for the treatment, it is necessary to further enlarge to understand the constitution of the therapeutic purpose.

於日本特開2005-334426號公報中,記載有一種於電腦之螢幕畫面上顯示複數張預先攝影之口腔內影像資料之構成。Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2005-334426 discloses a configuration in which a plurality of pre-recorded intra-oral image data are displayed on a screen of a computer.

於日本特開平10-97405號中,揭示有一種藉由使用電腦之動畫、靜態影像顯示之表達方法,提高對專業用語之理解等知情同意書用之工具。In Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 10-97405, a tool for informing informed consent is obtained by using an animation of a computer or an expression method of a still image display to improve understanding of professional terms.

又,亦記載有可將此種表達方法於小學、初中、各企業、老人設施等中用於教育之內容。Further, it is also described that the expression method can be used for education in elementary schools, junior high schools, companies, and elderly facilities.

於日本特開平10-201757號公報中,揭示有一種使X光影像可視化之螢光膜、及利用稜鏡使經可視化之影像反射而利用攝影機進行攝影之構成。Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. Hei 10-201757 discloses a fluorescent film that visualizes an X-ray image and a configuration in which a visualized image is reflected by a cymbal and photographed by a camera.

[先前技術文獻][Previous Technical Literature]

[專利文獻][Patent Literature]

[專利文獻1] 日本特開平10-97404號公報[Patent Document 1] Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 10-97404

[專利文獻2] 日本特開2001-212161號公報[Patent Document 2] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2001-212161

[專利文獻3] 日本特開2005-144171號公報[Patent Document 3] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2005-144171

[專利文獻4] 日本特開昭62-246347號公報[Patent Document 4] Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 62-246347

[專利文獻5] 日本特開2001-29315號公報[Patent Document 5] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2001-29315

[專利文獻6] 日本特開2002-355262號公報[Patent Document 6] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2002-355262

[專利文獻7] 日本特開2005-304600號公報[Patent Document 7] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2005-304600

[專利文獻8] 日本實公平5-30402號公報[Patent Document 8] Japanese Real Fair 5-30402

[專利文獻9] 日本實用新型登錄第3131408號[Patent Document 9] Japanese Utility Model Registration No. 3131408

[專利文獻10] USP5752827號公報[Patent Document 10] USP5752827

[專利文獻11] 日本特開2009-516555號公報[Patent Document 11] Japanese Patent Laid-Open Publication No. 2009-516555

[專利文獻12] 日本特開平10-201757號公報[Patent Document 12] Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 10-201757

[專利文獻13] 日本特開平5-130991號公報[Patent Document 13] Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 5-130991

[專利文獻14] 日本特開平10-97405號公報[Patent Document 14] Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. Hei 10-97405

利用影像顯示之口腔內之觀察被多次提出,但最終停止於先前之單次且局部之治療系統上之對於患者之資訊提供,未到達謀求口腔內之所有齒之健全化般之系統之地步。Observations in the oral cavity using image display have been proposed many times, but ultimately stop the information provided to the patient on the previous single and local treatment system, and have not reached the point of perfecting the system of seeking all the teeth in the oral cavity. .

當牙科醫師對患者進行治療說明時,有時亦使用藉由牙科用攝影機而獲得之患者之口腔內影像或X光影像,但影像本身難以理解。Intra-oral or X-ray images of a patient obtained by a dental camera are sometimes used when the dentist treats the patient, but the image itself is difficult to understand.

患者容易理解之影像、資料使牙科醫師容易對患者進行診療之說明,並且可期待患者對口腔內之關心與自我管理意識之增加,但響應如上所述之期待之機器、影像顯示等尚未提出。The images and materials that are easily understood by the patient make it easy for the dentist to diagnose the patient, and the patient's awareness of the care and self-management in the oral cavity can be expected, but the expected response to the above-mentioned machine, image display, etc. has not been proposed.

隨著牙科診所之增加,牙科醫業不得不有意識地進行經營,為了使經營穩定化而推出新的牙科診療、成本之抑制、持續來門診治療之患者之獲得、牙科醫業之合理化成為必要,亦提出有如日本實用新型登錄第3131408號之移動終端機。With the increase in dental clinics, the dental industry has to operate consciously, and it is necessary to introduce new dental treatments, cost reduction, continuous patient visits, and rationalization of dental care in order to stabilize operations. A mobile terminal such as Japanese Utility Model Registration No. 3131408 is also proposed.

鑒於上述內容,本發明具備:連攝影像列形成手段,其連攝攝影齒列之側面而形成影像列;側面齒列影像形成手段,其以由上述連攝影像列形成手段所形成之影像列作為部分之齒列影像,自成為整體合成之中心之影像進行合成而形成複數之部分齒列影像;側面齒列影像合成手段,其根據於由上述側面齒列影像形成手段所形成之複數之部分齒列影像間成為整體合成之中心之影像進行連結合成而形成整體之齒列;藉此使用手持型之口腔內攝影機可形成明瞭之全景齒列,進而藉由並設顯示X光全景齒列影像及經虛擬矯正或虛擬審美著色之全景齒列,或者進行重疊顯示,可擴大牙科中之診療範圍。In view of the above, the present invention includes: a photographic image sequence forming means for forming a sequence of images by aligning the side faces of the photographic rows; and a side dentition image forming means for forming the image columns formed by the photographic image forming means As a part of the dentition image, a plurality of dentition images are formed by synthesizing the image which is the center of the overall compositing; and the side dentition image synthesizing means is based on the plural part formed by the side dentition image forming means The images of the center of the overall synthesis are connected and integrated to form a whole dentition; thereby, a hand-held intraoral camera can be used to form a clear panoramic dentition, and the X-ray panoramic dentition image can be displayed by collocation And the panoramic dentition with virtual correction or virtual aesthetic coloring, or overlapping display, can expand the scope of diagnosis and treatment in dentistry.

進而,本發明藉由如下之組合構成,提高患者對治療之自覺,謀求口腔內之健全化,並且可持續獲得患者而實現牙科醫業之經營效率之提高,上述組合構成係由如下手段構成:單位影像化手段,其針對每一診療改善單位將口腔內影像化;設定手段,其對利用上述單位影像化手段進行單位影像化所得之影像,設定診療改善順序資訊;顯示手段,其根據診療改善順序資訊以可一覽地顯示之方式顯示附加有上述診療改善順序資訊之影像;顯示媒體,其顯示記錄有利用上述顯示手段所獲得之顯示資訊。Further, the present invention is constituted by the following combination, which improves the patient's self-consciousness in treatment, seeks to improve the oral cavity, and continuously obtains a patient to achieve an improvement in the operational efficiency of the dental industry. The above-described combination is composed of the following means: The unit imaging means for visualizing the oral cavity for each medical treatment improvement unit; and setting means for setting the medical treatment improvement order information for the image obtained by unit imaging using the unit imaging means; and displaying means for improving according to the medical treatment The sequence information displays an image to which the above-mentioned medical treatment improvement order information is attached in a viewable manner; and the display medium displays and displays the display information obtained by the above display means.

本發明係利用具備處理器、記憶體、通訊手段、輸入手段及顯示手段之小型移動終端機進行用於牙科從事者使用電腦等螢幕利用上述方法等對患者說明治療內容之資料製成、或牙科從事者之考勤處理、診療報酬處理等使用電腦所進行之資料處理,藉此實現牙科醫業之合理化。The present invention is made of a small mobile terminal having a processor, a memory, a communication means, an input means, and a display means, and is used for a dental practitioner to use a computer or the like to describe the treatment content of the patient by the above method or the like, or to perform dental treatment. The use of computer processing data processing, such as attendance processing, medical treatment, and the like, to rationalize the dental industry.

本發明中所示之影像係最終表示數位影像者,可使用動畫、靜態影像中之任一者。The image shown in the present invention is a person who finally represents a digital image, and can use either an animation or a still image.

本發明中之「成為整體合成之中心之影像」係指例如合成2個部分全景影像時之兩者共通之影像。對於「整體」,並非僅表示最終之整體全景齒列影像,例如當形成3個以上之部分齒列影像時,亦包含最初合成2個部分全景齒列影像所獲得之合成中途之全景齒列影像。「自成為整體合成之中心之影像進行合成」係指自例如前齒之表面之中央之一個齒之一部分到達中央之影像,合成連攝臼齒方向之齒列所獲得之複數之靜態影像而形成左側部分齒列全景影像與右側部分齒列全景影像。「連結合成」係指例如於左側部分齒列全景影像與右側部分齒列全景影像中兩者共通之部位進行合成,或者根據可連結之部位進行連接而合成。The "image which becomes the center of the overall composition" in the present invention refers to, for example, an image common to both of the two partial panoramic images. For the "whole", it does not mean only the final panoramic dentition image. For example, when three or more partial dentition images are formed, the panoramic dentition image obtained by synthesizing the two partial panoramic dentition images is also included. . "Synthesis from the image which is the center of the overall composition" refers to an image from the center of one of the teeth of the surface of the front teeth to the center, and a plurality of still images obtained by the dentition in the direction of the teeth are formed to form the left side. Partial dentition panoramic image and right side dentition panoramic image. "Link synthesis" refers to, for example, synthesis of a portion common to both the left partial dentition panoramic image and the right partial dentition panoramic image, or a connection based on the connectable portions.

本發明有對包含成為合成之中心之部分之影像設定標記之情形,該標記係指例如不易被唾液、水等溶解,具有細長之長方形狀或較短之長方形狀,為例如於背面塗布有接著劑、黏著劑之封件,且可剝落之附著物。The present invention has a case where a mark is set to include an image which is a part of the center of synthesis, and the mark means, for example, that it is not easily dissolved by saliva, water, or the like, and has an elongated rectangular shape or a short rectangular shape, for example, coated on the back surface. a seal of the agent, the adhesive, and a peelable attachment.

又,不限定於附著物,亦可藉由可擦掉顏色且容易明確地攝影之著色有綠、紅等之筆將標記描繪於齒上。Further, the mark is not limited to the attached matter, and the mark may be drawn on the tooth by a pen which can be erased with a color and can be easily and clearly photographed with green or red.

配置標記之部位較佳為配置成覆蓋上齒與下齒,於例如僅攝影上顎、下顎之任一者之情形時,亦可僅配置攝影之一者。Preferably, the portion where the mark is disposed is disposed to cover the upper and lower teeth, and for example, when only one of the upper and lower jaws is photographed, only one of the photographs may be disposed.

配置標記之齒列上之既定位置係指藉由改變例如攝影機之攝影方向或拿法等,而攝影中斷,或者動作靜止之位置,表示成為合成之中心之影像。The predetermined position on the tooth row of the configuration mark refers to a position where the photographing is interrupted or the motion is stopped by changing, for example, the photographing direction or the photographing method of the camera, and the image is the center of the composition.

以於攝影影像上容易辨別之顏色(綠、藍等)、形狀形成即可,材質、顏色可適當選擇。又,於獲得三維影像之情形時,亦可使用有特徵之具備立體性者。標記為顯示於齒之表面,且於所攝影之影像上明確地顯示位置者即可,因此亦可為例如設置照射具有投影於齒表面之尺寸既知之形狀之雷射照準光之照射手段之情形、或以可自口腔內攝影機朝向齒進行照射之方式配置如聚光燈般,照明距離與所照射之光之面積處於對應關係之照射手段。The color (green, blue, etc.) and shape can be easily formed on the photographic image, and the material and color can be appropriately selected. Moreover, in the case of obtaining a three-dimensional image, it is also possible to use a feature having three-dimensionality. It is only necessary to display the position on the surface of the tooth and clearly display the position on the image to be photographed. Therefore, for example, it is possible to provide an irradiation means for irradiating the laser with the known shape of the size projected on the surface of the tooth. Or, in a manner that can be irradiated from the intra-oral camera toward the teeth, an illumination means such as a spotlight is provided, and the illumination distance corresponds to the area of the irradiated light.

亦有標記至少自標記攝影於既定位置之影像開始合成即可,攝影方向無需自臼齒起之情形。亦有如下之情形:攝影方向與合成方向亦可不一定相反,合成時自標記顯示於既定位置之影像向左右進行部分合成,最終根據標記顯示於既定位置之影像進行整體合成即可。對於開始合成之標記之既定位置,例示例如標記位於攝影影像之中心之情形,但並不限定於此,於部分合成與整體合成中,為合成容易進行之部位即可。There are also marks that can be synthesized at least from the image where the mark is photographed at a predetermined position, and the photographing direction does not need to be from the caries. There are also cases in which the photographing direction and the synthesizing direction are not necessarily opposite. When synthesizing, the image displayed at a predetermined position from the mark is partially combined to the left and right, and finally the image is displayed based on the image displayed at the predetermined position. The predetermined position of the mark to start the synthesis is, for example, a case where the mark is located at the center of the photographic image, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and in the partial synthesis and the overall synthesis, the portion which is easy to synthesize may be used.

於標記對例如齒之背面側側面等,齒列之右、中央、左之3個側面進行部分合成時,亦有需要右側面與中央側面之中間之齒、及中央側面與右側面之牙齒之2個之情形,亦有亦可附加複數之標記之情形。本發明之齒列之側面不僅指正面側,亦有包含背面側、咬合面之情形。連攝係指每秒自動攝影30張以下。When the mark pair is partially combined with the right side, the center, and the left side of the tooth row, for example, the teeth on the right side and the center side are required, and the teeth on the center side and the right side are also required. In the case of two cases, there may be cases where a plural number may be attached. The side surface of the tooth row of the present invention refers not only to the front side but also to the back side and the occlusal side. Continuous shooting refers to automatic photography of 30 or less per second.

合成係全景合成方法,進行合成時之方法選擇性地使用既存之方法即可,可利用簡單合成法、簡單列舉法、區塊匹配法、及Lucas-Kanade法等光學流量推斷法等自動或手動之合成方法,較佳為事先利用仿射轉換等影像調整手段,根據影像間之共通部分,調整傾斜度、倍率等。Synthetic system panoramic synthesis method, the method of synthesizing can selectively use the existing method, and can be automatically or manually by simple synthesis method, simple enumeration method, block matching method, and optical flow inference method such as Lucas-Kanade method. In the method of synthesizing, it is preferable to use an image adjustment means such as affine conversion in advance to adjust the inclination, the magnification, and the like according to the common portion between the images.

本發明中之特徵部位係指表示結合部分齒列全景影像時之結合位置之線狀、點狀、圖形狀或立體狀者,於例如合成2個側面全景影像之情形時,表示中央之前齒與前齒之邊界線,但並不限定於此,亦包含前齒一個、有特徵之齒或齒齦之前端等部位。The feature portion in the present invention refers to a line shape, a dot shape, a figure shape or a three-dimensional shape indicating a joint position when a partial dentition panoramic image is combined, and for example, in the case of synthesizing two side panoramic images, the central front tooth and The boundary line of the front teeth is not limited thereto, and includes a front tooth, a characteristic tooth or a front end of the gum.

針對每個診療改善單位將口腔內影像化之單位影像化手段中之口腔內係表示齒、齒列、齒齦、齒槽骨、唇、硬口蓋、軟口蓋、懸雍垂等區域者。The intraoral system in the unit imaging means for visualizing the intraoral imaging for each treatment improvement unit indicates a region such as a tooth, a tooth row, a gum, a alveolar bone, a lip, a hard flap, a soft flap, and a uvula.

診療包含檢查與治療,有牙醫進行檢查,治療係於全體醫療機關進行之情形。The diagnosis and treatment includes examination and treatment, and the dentist performs the examination, and the treatment is performed by all medical institutions.

診療改善單位係蛀牙、牙周病、舌癌、齒齦癌等,較佳為表示一次檢查、治療之範圍,除此以外有亦表示污垢、矯正等改善、預防處理、準診療之情形。The unit for improving the diagnosis and treatment is cavities, periodontal disease, tongue cancer, gum cancer, etc., and it is preferable to indicate the range of one examination and treatment, and it also indicates that the dirt, the correction, the like, the prevention treatment, and the quasi-diagnosis are also indicated.

改善係指利用刷洗、氟、口臭預防劑之塗布等可克服之程度者、或將氟塗布於齒般之預防處置、清洗、牙周病等預防劑之塗布等行為者。The improvement refers to an action that can be overcome by brushing, fluorine, or a treatment of a bad breath preventive agent, or the application of a preventive agent such as a prophylactic treatment such as a prophylactic treatment, a cleansing, or a periodontal disease.

影像化表示轉換成可輸出顯示於電腦之螢幕(顯示器)裝置、行動電話顯示部之影像資料,除此以外表示印字、印刷於用紙之狀態等形成有二維或三維之顯示之狀態。The imaged representation is converted into image data that can be displayed on a screen (display) device or a mobile phone display unit of a computer, and is displayed in a state in which two-dimensional or three-dimensional display is formed in a state of printing or printing on paper.

對利用上述單位影像化手段進行單位影像化所得之影像設定診療改善順序資訊之設定手段之診療改善順序資訊係指表示診療、預防、改善之順序之記號、符號、數值等者,除此以外係表示診療日期、疾病之發展狀況、疾病發展之預測等資料者,為至少可對複數之單位影像決定診療改善之順序者即可,除可直接目視確認之內容以外,亦可為運算用之參數,且藉由電腦運算處理可確認者。The medical treatment improvement order information indicating the setting means of the medical treatment improvement order information by the unit imaging method using the unit imaging means is a symbol, a symbol, a numerical value, etc. indicating the order of diagnosis, prevention, and improvement, and the like. The data indicating the date of diagnosis, the development of the disease, and the prediction of the development of the disease may be used to determine the order of diagnosis and improvement for at least a plurality of unit images. In addition to the contents that can be directly visually confirmed, the parameters for calculation may also be used. And can be confirmed by computer operation processing.

「以可一覽地顯示之方式進行顯示」係至少診療改善順序為一覽,若於可容易地辨別整體之狀態下,則亦有亦可以捲動地更換印刷於複數張用紙者、複數影像而顯示之狀態等構成之情形。"Displaying in a manner that can be displayed in a list" is a list of at least the diagnosis and improvement procedures. If the overall status is easily identifiable, it is also possible to scroll and display the plurality of sheets and multiple images. The state of the state, etc.

顯示記錄有利用上述顯示手段所獲得之顯示資訊之顯示媒體係指於1張以上之用紙、冊子進行印字、印刷而顯示之狀態、或可攜式地顯示根據JPEG、GIF、BMP等樣式之影像資料之狀態,亦有顯示媒體係指用紙狀、冊子狀之紙媒體、USB記憶體、SD(Secure Digital,安全數位)卡、或具備記憶體等記錄元件之顯示裝置、行動電話等之情形,至少表示患者可進行攜帶,且可觀察口腔內之印刷、印字物、電子影像等。又,亦包含於網際網路上之首頁顯示上,閱覽患者之口腔內資料之情形,因此顯示媒體中亦包含桌上型電腦、筆記型之個人電腦。The display medium on which the display information obtained by the above display means is recorded is displayed in a state in which one or more sheets of paper or booklet are printed or printed, or a display image based on JPEG, GIF, BMP or the like is portablely displayed. In the state of the data, the display medium refers to a paper-like, booklet-shaped paper medium, a USB memory, an SD (Secure Digital) card, or a display device having a recording element such as a memory, a mobile phone, and the like. At least the patient can carry it, and the printing, printing, electronic images, and the like in the oral cavity can be observed. In addition, it is also included in the home page display on the Internet to view the patient's oral data. Therefore, the display media also includes a desktop computer and a notebook computer.

本發明利用反射鏡故照射光之光程相對較長,使用具有根據指向角之擴散之LED(Light Emitting Diode,發光二極體)等照準光源,藉此可使攝影位置與攝影範圍明確。According to the present invention, since the optical path of the illumination light is relatively long by using the mirror, an illumination source having an LED (Light Emitting Diode) according to the diffusion of the directivity angle is used, whereby the photographing position and the photographing range can be made clear.

本發明係於利用反射鏡之口腔內攝影機中,牙醫等即便於經由該反射鏡所攝影之影像上亦可明確地理解攝影位置。The present invention is directed to an intraoral camera using a mirror, and a dentist or the like can clearly understand the photographing position even on an image photographed through the mirror.

進而,本發明係對縱橫地移動之口腔內攝影機之姿勢藉由陀螺儀感測器測定本體之角度資訊,根據該本體之角度導出鏡之角度,從而掌握處於何種狀態下。根據攝影狀態調整影像之姿勢,藉此謀求不論縱橫地移動之攝影機之狀態,均始終顯示容易觀察之狀態之影像。Further, the present invention measures the angle information of the main body by the gyro sensor by the posture of the intra-oral camera that moves vertically and horizontally, and derives the angle of the mirror based on the angle of the main body to grasp the state. By adjusting the posture of the image in accordance with the photographing state, it is possible to always display an image in an easily viewable state regardless of the state of the camera moving in the vertical and horizontal directions.

於本發明中,使用角速度感測器(陀螺儀感測器)、加速度感測器等位置感測器。具體而言,例示輸出角速度之速率陀螺儀、輸出角度之速率積分陀螺儀、姿勢陀螺儀、MEMS(micro electro mechanical systems,微機電系統)型及其他機械式、光學式等角速度感測器、壓阻型、靜電電容型、熱偵測型之MEMS感測器等加速度感測器。In the present invention, a position sensor such as an angular velocity sensor (gyro sensor), an acceleration sensor, or the like is used. Specifically, a rate gyro output rate gyro, an output angle rate integrated gyro, a posture gyro, a MEMS (micro electro mechanical systems) type, and other mechanical, optical, etc. angular velocity sensors, pressure Acceleration sensors such as resistive, electrostatic, and thermal-sensing MEMS sensors.

本發明中之照準光之顏色為可與照明光之顏色識別之顏色即可,若照明光為白色,則照準光可例示紅色、綠色等。又,照準光之照射時序較佳為使用者開始攝影之前之時序,亦有亦可於攝影時進行短時間之照射之情形。The color of the illuminating light in the present invention may be a color that can be recognized by the color of the illumination light. If the illumination light is white, the illuminating light may be exemplified by red, green, or the like. Further, the irradiation timing of the collimated light is preferably a timing before the user starts photographing, and may also be irradiated for a short time at the time of photographing.

進而,本發明係可裝著於身體之移動終端機,於內部配置儲存手段、電腦、與外部之通訊用調變解調手段及顯示手段,可進行整個牙科醫業之輸入輸出,藉此所有牙科從業者可隨手進行電子病歷、診療報酬計算等,且藉由使該等資訊共有化及顯示等之同步化,即便人數有限,亦可分散進行牙科事務、診療相關之事務處理,從而實現牙科醫業之合理化。Further, the present invention is applicable to a mobile terminal of a body, and is internally provided with a storage means, a computer, an external modulation modulation demodulation means and a display means, and can perform input and output of the entire dental medical facility, thereby Dental practitioners can carry out electronic medical records, calculation of medical rewards, etc., and by synchronizing the sharing and display of such information, even if the number of people is limited, the dental affairs and medical treatments can be distributed to achieve dental treatment. Rationalization of the medical profession.

本發明較佳為操作用介面於治療時配置於可操作之位置,根據操作者而操作方法有所不同,根據手指夠不到介面之因身體要件而無法操作之狀況、或對患者進行說明之狀況(例如口頭說明與畫面顯示需要時間之情形等),設置藉由介面之操作方法對操作用介面之操作與實際之執行動作進行時間延遲之調整手段。Preferably, the operation interface is disposed at an operable position during the treatment, and the operation method is different according to the operator, and the operation cannot be performed according to the physical requirement of the interface, or the patient is described. The status (for example, the verbal description and the time required for the screen display), and the means for adjusting the time delay of the operation of the operation interface and the actual execution operation by the operation method of the interface.

此時,例如若操作用介面為開關類,則當連續2次按壓開關時,亦可根據以2秒後進行執行之方式按壓之次數調整延遲時間,或者進行利用按壓次數、按壓時間等調整顯示手段之顯示時序之GUI(Graphical User Interface,圖形使用者介面)之操作。In this case, for example, when the operation interface is a switch, when the switch is pressed twice, the delay time may be adjusted according to the number of times of pressing after 2 seconds, or the display may be adjusted by the number of presses, the press time, or the like. The operation of the GUI (Graphical User Interface) of the display timing of the means.

進而,本發明具備如下手段:獲取X光影像,與實體影像重疊,接合例如每個齒之X光影像,形成全景之影像,與以同樣之方式攝影結合之實體影像重疊,可進行來自齒列之側面之全景之比較。Furthermore, the present invention has the following means: acquiring an X-ray image, overlapping the solid image, and joining, for example, an X-ray image of each tooth to form a panoramic image, overlapping with the solid image combined in the same manner, and performing the dentition A comparison of the sides of the side.

於顯示手段上進行該實體影像與X光影像之重疊、並置等,藉此實現患者對治療之進一步之理解。The overlapping and juxtaposition of the physical image and the X-ray image are performed on the display means, thereby achieving a further understanding of the patient's treatment.

進而,本發明形成如下終端機:其無線或有線地與電腦終端機連接,視情形包含液晶顯示部、數字小鍵盤等,且可裝著於使用者之臂、足、其他部位,可隨手進行患者資訊等與電腦終端機之輸入輸出,牙科醫師可於患者無法觀察之狀態下處理治療所必需之過去之資料或對每個患者進行治療說明時之預備知識,可對患者進行確切之診療與治療說明等。Furthermore, the present invention forms a terminal device that is connected to a computer terminal device wirelessly or by wire, and includes a liquid crystal display portion, a numeric keypad, and the like as appropriate, and can be mounted on the arm, foot, and other parts of the user. The patient information and the input and output of the computer terminal, the dentist can process the past data necessary for the treatment or the pre-requisite knowledge for the treatment instructions for each patient in the state that the patient cannot observe, and can perform the exact diagnosis and treatment of the patient. Treatment instructions, etc.

即,與牙科診療系統集成,上述牙科診療系統係由如下手段所構成:輸入牙科相關資訊之輸入部、具備顯示牙科相關資訊之顯示部之移動終端機、暫時或持續地記錄牙科相關資訊之記錄手段、具備根據既定之演算法對上述牙科相關資訊進行處理之處理手段之主機終端機、於上述移動終端機與中央終端機間無線或有線地進行資訊傳遞之資訊傳遞手段,關於上述移動終端機,牙科從事者各自既可將其裝著於臂、足、上半身、下半身等身體部位而攜帶,牙科從事者全員或其中一部分亦可共有所顯示之資訊。That is, integrated with the dental treatment system, the dental treatment system is composed of an input unit for inputting dental related information, a mobile terminal having a display unit for displaying dental related information, and a record for temporarily or continuously recording dental related information. And a means for transmitting information by means of a host terminal having a processing means for processing the dental related information according to a predetermined algorithm, and transmitting information between the mobile terminal and the central terminal wirelessly or by wire, with respect to the mobile terminal The dental practitioners can carry them on the body parts such as the arms, the feet, the upper body and the lower body, and the dental practitioners or some of them can share the information displayed.

除如上所示設為可攜式之構成以外,亦可為使用為平板型或桌上型之電腦者,於上述情形時,亦可進行與牙科相關之一元管理。In addition to the portable type as described above, it can also be used as a tablet type or a desktop type computer. In the above case, it is also possible to perform one-piece management related to dentistry.

本移動終端機係可輸入輸出,且可進行資訊處理之終端機,因此可一元地管理口腔內資訊、牙科診療資訊、牙科事務資訊、牙科從事者資訊等牙科醫業相關資訊。具體而言,例示表示可顯示來自相對應之軟體、口腔內攝影機等周邊機器等之資訊,或者可進行新資料之追加、修正、刪除等輸入處理及資料之儲存之狀態,可使其他移動終端機、主機終端機之資料共有、同步而進行顯示、輸入處理之狀態者,但並不限定於此,至少可自移動終端機進行所需之牙科資訊之顯示與記錄、及輸入處理即可。The mobile terminal is a terminal that can input and output and can perform information processing. Therefore, dental information such as oral information, dental information, dental affairs information, and dental information can be managed in one unit. Specifically, the example shows that the information from the peripheral device such as the corresponding software or the in-oral camera can be displayed, or the input processing such as adding, correcting, and deleting new data and the storage of the data can be performed, and other mobile terminals can be made. The information of the machine and the host terminal is shared and synchronized, and the status of the display and input processing is performed. However, the present invention is not limited thereto, and at least the display, recording, and input processing of the required dental information may be performed from the mobile terminal.

於電腦之螢幕畫面上,例如於移動終端機之畫面顯示項目單,除此以外,每於使用者利用滑鼠等選擇各資訊時形成畫面切換之顯示或於一個畫面中既定患者之所有資訊分別作為窗口畫面而顯示。On the screen of the computer, for example, the menu item is displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal. In addition, when the user selects each information by using a mouse or the like, a screen switching display is formed or all the information of the patient is determined in one screen. Displayed as a window screen.

使用者係依據畫面之顯示內容,進行選擇、新建、校正、刪除等輸入,輸入亦可使用設置之數字小鍵盤或虛擬數字小鍵盤而進行,或者亦可藉由預先設定之輸入文字之利用滑鼠或數字小鍵盤等之選擇而進行。The user selects, creates, calibrates, deletes, etc. according to the display content of the screen, and the input can also be performed by using the set numeric keypad or the virtual numeric keypad, or by using the preset input text. The mouse or numeric keypad is selected for selection.

又,牙科從業員之考勤之輸入亦可由例如各個從業員使用患者之移動終端機、主機終端機而進行,或者考勤擔當者亦可自患者之移動終端機或主機終端機進行新建、校正、刪除等輸入。於牙科從事者各自具有移動終端機,且僅各個擔當者可進行處理之情形時,亦可對擔當者進行密碼之設定。Moreover, the input of the attendance of the dental practitioner can also be performed by, for example, the use of the patient's mobile terminal or the host terminal by each practitioner, or the attendance operator can also perform the creation, correction, deletion, etc. input from the patient's mobile terminal or the host terminal. . When the dental practitioners each have a mobile terminal and only the person in charge can handle the situation, the password can be set for the person in charge.

一元管理係表示可利用例如一個終端機,進行口腔內資訊、牙科診療資訊、牙科事務資訊、牙科從事者資訊等牙科醫業相關資訊之輸入輸出顯示之情形者,但並不限定於此,即便為上述一部分資訊,若為與作為目的之管理對象相對應者則亦包含於其中。The unitary management system indicates that, for example, a terminal device can be used for inputting and outputting information on dental medical information such as oral information, dental medical information, dental affairs information, and dental information, but the present invention is not limited thereto. For the above part of the information, it is also included if it corresponds to the management object of the purpose.

本發明進而可藉由組合預先經細分化之部分之細分化影像而形成牙科治療之項目單,並且可形成與每個患者之治療相對應之靜態影像、幻燈片動畫、或動畫等說明用影像。The present invention can further form a menu item for dental treatment by combining the subdivided image of the pre-subdivided portion, and can form an image for explanation such as a still image, a slide animation, or an animation corresponding to the treatment of each patient. .

細分化影像係例如拔牙影像、對咬牙延伸影像、加工物之說明影像等,較佳為利用CG影像、動態影像而預先製成。牙科醫師、牙科衛生員等根據患者自植入物治療或彌補物治療等治療項目單顯示中選擇、結合該等,或者患者進行選擇並結合。The subdivided image is, for example, a tooth extraction image, a tooth extension image, a description image of the processed object, and the like, and is preferably prepared in advance using CG images and motion images. The dentist, the dental hygienist, and the like select, combine, or combine the treatment item list display such as the patient's self-implant treatment or the treatment of the make-up, or the patient selects and combines.

選擇只要選擇各個細分化影像,於電腦上連續地執行即可。又,亦可為準備複數之預先選擇之既成動畫,牙科從業者或患者將其作為治療說明用組合動畫,於治療前、治療後、有時於治療中進行觀察。Simply select each subdivided image and execute it continuously on your computer. Further, it is also possible to prepare a plurality of pre-selected artificial animations, and the dental practitioner or the patient uses the combined animation as a treatment instruction to observe before, after, and sometimes during treatment.

該連結之影像可形成結合患者自身之治療狀況之內容,因而可期待進一步之理解與對蛀牙預防等啟蒙活動之效果。提出如下之治療系統:亦可將該部分狀之動畫、利用攝影手段攝影患者之影像所得者轉換成相同之影像樣式而使用,使患者容易理解,且對於牙科醫師等使用者而言容易使用。The image of the link can form a combination of the patient's own treatment status, and thus can be expected to further understand and effect on the enlightenment activity such as tooth decay prevention. The following treatment system is proposed: the partial animation and the image obtained by photographing the patient's image by means of photography can be converted into the same image pattern, which is easy for the patient to understand and easy for the user such as a dentist.

本發明可對一部分或全部之齒列進行利用實體影像之明瞭之全景顯示,進而可視情形將X光影像重疊或者並記而進行顯示,因此可使用該顯示對患者進行容易理解之診療說明。According to the present invention, a part or all of the tooth rows can be displayed in a panoramic view using the physical image, and the X-ray images can be superimposed or recorded in a visible manner, and thus the patient can be easily explained by the display.

本發明可準確地顯示使用反射鏡之口腔內攝影機之攝影位置,並且可掌握於口腔內縱橫地移動之攝影單元之攝影姿勢,而調整為容易觀察攝影影像之狀態。The present invention can accurately display the photographing position of the intraoral camera using the mirror, and can grasp the photographing posture of the photographing unit that moves vertically and horizontally in the oral cavity, and adjust to the state in which the photographed image is easily observed.

患者經常藉由將患者之口腔內之狀況與診療之必要性可攜帶地一覽顯示於用紙或記錄媒體之顯示手段而進行辨別,藉此持續地進行為了口腔內健全化之診療與改善之可能性變高,亦可謀求牙科醫業中之收益之提高等經營改善。The patient often recognizes the condition in the oral cavity of the patient and the necessity of diagnosis and treatment on the paper or the display means of the recording medium, thereby continuously performing the diagnosis and improvement of the oral cavity. If you become higher, you can also improve your business in the dental industry.

本發明使用可進行數位資料處理之移動終端機處理整個牙科醫業之處理,藉此可謀求合理化與成本削減。The present invention processes the entire dental industry using a mobile terminal capable of digital data processing, thereby achieving rationalization and cost reduction.

本發明係一種連續攝影齒列,將利用全景合成之部分全景影像與該等部分之全景影像合成而形成整體之全景齒列之方法,較佳構成為對合成部配置標記,藉此可容易地利用手持攝影機形成齒列全景影像。The present invention relates to a continuous photographic tooth row, which is a method for synthesizing a partial panoramic image synthesized by a panoramic combination and a panoramic image of the portions to form an overall panoramic dentition, preferably configured by arranging a mark on the composite portion, thereby being easily configurable A dentition panoramic image is formed using a handheld camera.

本發明係自牙科診療時,或診察,除此以外家庭中攝影之口腔影像,使用口腔內攝影機、X光攝影裝置取得與診療、改善相對應之單位影像。將該單位影像放映於例如可與患者一起觀察之電腦用之螢幕(顯示器)裝置,患者一面辨別口腔內之狀況,一面將與牙科醫師一起記入診療之順序、診療之開始期間、診療之必要性之程度等而獲得之診療改善順序資訊與單位影像印字、印刷於一張用紙,或者將其儲存於具備儲存媒體之行動電話中並且顯示於行動電話之螢幕。或者,顯示於牙科醫師開設之首頁之個人專用之畫面。According to the present invention, an oral image which is photographed in a home is taken from a dental treatment, or an oral image captured in a home, and an intra-oral camera or an X-ray imaging device is used to obtain a unit image corresponding to the diagnosis and treatment. The unit image is displayed on a screen (display) device for a computer that can be observed with the patient, for example, and the patient is recorded with the dentist in the order of the diagnosis, the beginning of the treatment, and the necessity of the diagnosis. The medical treatment improvement order information obtained by the degree or the like is printed on the unit image, printed on a piece of paper, or stored in a mobile phone having a storage medium and displayed on a mobile phone screen. Or, it is displayed on the screen for personal use on the front page of the dentist.

本發明係可裝著於身體之移動終端機,於內部配置儲存手段、電腦、與外部之通訊用調變解調手段與顯示手段,可進行整個牙科醫業之輸入輸出及資料處理,藉此牙科從事者可於各自之身邊進行牙科從業者之考勤管理、電子病歷記入、診療報酬計算等,且使該等資訊共有化。移動終端機經由紅外線、光等媒體與主機終端機無線連接,或者有線連接。或者,移動終端機亦可具有經由無線LAN(Local Area Network,區域網路)、有線LAN等,連接於經雲計算之電腦網路之電腦規格。The invention can be installed in the mobile terminal of the body, and is internally arranged with storage means, computer, external communication modulation demodulation means and display means, and can perform input, output and data processing of the entire dental medical industry. Dental practitioners can perform dental attendance management, electronic medical record entry, medical treatment reward calculation, etc., and share such information. The mobile terminal is wirelessly connected to the host terminal via a medium such as infrared light or light, or is wired. Alternatively, the mobile terminal may have a computer specification that is connected to the cloud-based computer network via a wireless LAN (Local Area Network), a wired LAN, or the like.

[實施例1][Example 1]

繼而,參照圖式詳細說明本發明之實施例。In turn, embodiments of the invention are described in detail with reference to the drawings.

圖1(a)係表示本發明之一實施例之圖。Figure 1 (a) is a view showing an embodiment of the present invention.

11係口腔內影像攝影手段,為例如使用用以攝影上顎、下顎之全齒之攝影機,進行攝影,獲得數位影像資料之裝置。The 11-system intra-oral imaging means is, for example, a device that uses a camera for photographing a full-toothed jaw or a lower jaw to perform photography and obtain digital image data.

口腔內影像攝影手段11係例如如圖3(c)所示之使用凸面鏡之反射型之牙科用攝影機,其他使用魚眼鏡頭之口腔內攝影用之攝影機,輸出全齒之數位影像。The intra-oral imaging means 11 is, for example, a dental camera using a convex mirror as shown in FIG. 3(c), and a camera for intra-oral photography using a fisheye lens, and outputs a digital image of a full-tooth.

或者,亦可使用如圖6所示利用普通之口腔內攝影機攝影各齒,自各個攝影影像抽取輪廓,於上述輪廓之共通部進行連接,並進行合成,獲得全齒影像之方法等。Alternatively, a method of photographing each tooth using a normal intraoral camera, extracting a contour from each photographic image, connecting the common portions of the contours, synthesizing, and obtaining a full-tooth image may be used.

12係診療部位檢測手段,係例如用以設定用於診療或改善之齒及上述齒之既定之範圍者,藉由目視使用繪圖軟體自由口腔內影像攝影手段11輸入之廣範圍之口腔內影像切割並抽取。The 12-series diagnosis site detection means is, for example, used to set a predetermined range of teeth for the diagnosis or improvement and the above-mentioned teeth, and a wide range of intraoral image cutting input by visually using the graphic software free intraoral imaging means 11 And extract.

或者,表示藉由軟體之處理抽取並求得齒之輪廓,將所抽取之輪廓假定為圓並求得其中心,抽取自該中心,半徑長於輪廓之10%~20%之半徑之影像之步驟等。Or, the step of extracting and obtaining the contour of the tooth by the processing of the software, taking the extracted contour as a circle and obtaining the center thereof, and extracting the image from the center having a radius longer than the radius of 10% to 20% of the contour. Wait.

13係單位影像形成手段,係將利用上述診療部位檢測手段12所獲得之用於診療之影像加工形成為顯示用者,且為用以形成附加有記入診療順序、註解之區域之影像者。The 13-series unit image forming means is formed by the image processing for the diagnosis and treatment obtained by the medical site detecting means 12, and is used to form an image in which an area to be recorded and annotated is added.

單位影像形成手段13係藉由於上述診療部位檢測手段12藉由利用軟體之圖示操作指定診療部位,自動地製成顯示模型。The unit image forming means 13 automatically creates a display model by the medical site detecting means 12 operating the designated medical site by the graphical operation of the software.

影像亦可為自由口腔內影像攝影手段11輸入之影像僅放映指定範圍之情形,或另外,使用者患者亦可指定所製成之單位影像顯示之模型。The image may also be used to display only a specified range of images input by the free intra-oral imaging means 11 or, in addition, the user's patient may also specify a model of the unit image display produced.

影像亦可於顯示有單位影像之時間點,利用圖3所示之使用適當之反射鏡之攝影機進行攝影,而使其顯示。上述顯示係於上述單位影像區域中最初動畫地顯示,然後,亦可藉由按壓確定按鈕,進行確定而顯示為靜態影像。The image can also be displayed by using a camera using an appropriate mirror as shown in FIG. 3 at the time point when the unit image is displayed. The display is initially displayed in an animation in the unit image area, and then displayed as a still image by pressing the OK button.

14係診療順序設定手段,根據例如蛀牙之發展狀況或診療改善之程度,牙科醫師亦可自行地或與患者進行商量,或者自動地測定蛀牙之發展狀況或形狀之變形度,而決定順序。自動順序之決定亦可藉由將齒之顏色之差異數值化並與固定之閾值進行比較,或自齒之基本形,上述變形度超過某固定值以上,或與蛀牙檢測波長之照明光源相對之根據波長之光譜成分之大小為既定值以上等,進行順序參照,變更螢幕(顯示器)裝置之畫面上之影像之順序。The 14-series diagnosis order setting means can determine the order based on, for example, the development of the cavities or the degree of improvement of the diagnosis, or the dentist can negotiate with the patient or automatically determine the degree of development of the cavities or the degree of deformation of the shape. The automatic sequence can also be determined by digitizing the difference in the color of the teeth and comparing it with a fixed threshold, or from the basic shape of the tooth, the degree of deformation exceeding a certain fixed value, or the basis of the illumination source relative to the detection wavelength of the caries detection. The size of the spectral component of the wavelength is equal to or greater than a predetermined value, and the order of the images on the screen of the screen (display) device is changed in order.

該變更係於與患者商量之後,決定治療、檢查之順序,因此決定之後,藉由按壓確定按鈕,配置於畫面上之單位影像之順序自動地變更並實施患者用之印刷,藉此可謀求診療時間之合理性。This change is based on the order of treatment and examination after consultation with the patient. Therefore, after the decision is made, the order of the unit images placed on the screen is automatically changed and the patient's printing is performed by pressing the OK button, thereby enabling diagnosis and treatment. The rationality of time.

15係診療說明形成手段,與診療順序設定手段14同樣,為牙科醫師將診療開始時期之記入、診療之緊急性或診療方法等患者認為必需之內容作為資料而記入之手段。該記入係來自電腦之鍵盤(例如圖3(315))之輸入、利用使用滑鼠(例如圖3(316))之操作之既定說明之選擇,於圖3所示之口腔內攝影機之操作按鈕連接於電腦之輸入介面之狀態下,亦可為利用操作附隨於攝影機本體之按鈕之輸入。In the same manner as the medical treatment order setting means 14, the 15th-stage medical treatment instruction means is a means for the dentist to record the contents necessary for the patient's entry into the medical treatment start period, the urgency of the medical treatment, or the medical treatment method. The entry is an input from a keyboard of a computer (for example, FIG. 3 (315)), an operation of using a mouse (for example, FIG. 3 (316)), and an operation button of the intraoral camera shown in FIG. In the state of being connected to the input interface of the computer, it is also possible to use the input of the button attached to the camera body.

診療說明形成手段15係於自圖2(c)至(e)所示之21b至23b中記入診療開始日期或診療開始預定日期,該日期亦可自動地顯示可診療之最短日。The medical treatment instruction forming means 15 is recorded in the 21st to 23b shown in Figs. 2(c) to (e), and the medical treatment start date or the medical treatment start scheduled date is also displayed, and the date can also automatically display the shortest day of the medical treatment.

可開始診療之最短日亦可具有以調出由記錄手段17記錄並儲存之各患者之資料庫中之診療開始預定日期記入欄,並顯示其中未記入之日之最短日之方式設定之功能。The shortest day at which the medical treatment can be started may also have a function of setting the date of the medical treatment start date in the database of each patient recorded and stored by the recording means 17 and displaying the shortest day of the date on which the date is not entered.

將具體構成示於圖1(b)中。其係診療說明形成手段之一部分構成,表示省略其他構成之狀態。151係患者資料庫調出手段,係記錄有圖2所示之影像資料、順序資料、治療開始日期(包含時間)資料及說明資料之資料庫,自形成有一般之管理者,將相關之資料記錄於暫時之記錄區域中。其亦可為於所儲存之資料較多之情形時,每於檢查時自資料庫調出資料之構成。The specific constitution is shown in Fig. 1(b). It is a part of the means for forming a medical treatment description, and the state in which other configurations are omitted is shown. 151 series patient database transfer means, which records the image data, sequence data, treatment start date (including time) data and description data shown in Figure 2, since the formation of general managers, the relevant information Recorded in the temporary recording area. It may also be used to transfer data from the database at the time of inspection when there is a large amount of stored information.

最短診療日期檢索手段152係自其中調出診療開始日期資料並自檢索開始日期檢索未記入診療開始日期之日期,於有不一致之資料之情形時,將其作為最短診療日期輸出。The shortest medical treatment date search means 152 is a date from which the medical treatment start date data is retrieved and the date from the search start date is not recorded in the medical treatment start date, and when there is an inconsistent data, it is output as the shortest medical treatment date.

153係最短診療日期顯示手段,為將由上述最短診療日期檢索手段152進行檢索而檢測之日期顯示於單位影像上之顯示部之手段。The 153-series shortest medical treatment date display means is a means for displaying the date detected by the shortest medical treatment date search means 152 on the display unit of the unit image.

154係空閒診療日期顯示手段,其係以容易知道空閒之診療日期之方式進行顯示者,亦可於電腦螢幕上進行例如類比時鐘與日曆之簡略顯示等1個月單位、數月單位、或1年單位之顯示。154 is an idle medical treatment date display means, which is displayed in such a manner that it is easy to know the date of diagnosis and treatment, and can also be displayed on a computer screen such as a one-month unit, a monthly unit, or the like, such as an analog clock and a calendar display. The display of the annual unit.

155係決定輸入手段,其係於患者同意之同時開始向資料庫記錄之輸入部。The 155 determines the input means, which begins the input to the database while the patient agrees.

156係記錄手段,為進行向資料庫之記錄之手段,該記錄手段156與記錄手段17相同,亦可於記錄手段17中形成確定記錄,關於診療日期,有同時其他醫師與患者制定同樣之計劃表之可能性,因此需要迅速之資料庫之記錄,從而較佳為決定之後立即進行向資料庫之記錄。156 is a means for recording to a database, and the recording means 156 is the same as the recording means 17, and a determination record can be formed in the recording means 17. As for the date of diagnosis, the other doctors and the patient have the same plan. The possibility of a table, therefore, requires a quick record of the database, so it is better to record to the database immediately after the decision.

16係顯示輸出手段,為於電腦之螢幕(顯示器)裝置之畫面上編輯由單位影像、診療順序及診療說明所構成之影像並顯示,或者使用印表機(例如、圖3(317))印字、印刷編輯於用紙上之影像者。16-series display output means for editing and displaying images consisting of unit images, medical treatment sequences, and medical instructions on the screen of a computer screen (display) device, or printing using a printer (for example, Fig. 3 (317)) Printed and edited on the paper.

17係記錄手段,為用以記錄所編輯之影像資料者,為用以作為牙醫所具有之電子病歷之一部分進行記錄,或者經由儲存媒體記錄於患者之行動電話、電腦之手段。記錄手段17包含自患者各自之資料,儲存患者整體之資料所得之資料庫。The 17-series recording means is a means for recording the edited image data, recording it as part of the electronic medical record of the dentist, or recording it on the patient's mobile phone or computer via the storage medium. The recording means 17 includes a database obtained from the respective data of the patient and storing the data of the patient as a whole.

繼而,表示並說明圖3所示之口腔內攝影機之一例。Next, an example of the intraoral camera shown in Fig. 3 will be described and explained.

301係握持用殼體,為了形成鉛筆狀之口腔內攝影機,而形成為圓筒狀,且於內部內接有電路基板、用以與外部連結之USB連接電路、USB插口。The 301-series holding case is formed in a cylindrical shape to form a pencil-shaped intraoral camera, and has a circuit board and a USB connection circuit and a USB socket for external connection.

於前端一體地連接有攝影機單元309,例如如圖3(e)所示攝影機單元309表示如下構成:於中心配置例如CCD攝影機,於其周邊,白色LED、其他顏色之LED、其他照明用元件312呈同心圓狀等間隔地配置。The camera unit 309 is integrally connected to the front end. For example, as shown in FIG. 3(e), the camera unit 309 has a configuration in which, for example, a CCD camera is disposed at the center, and white LEDs, LEDs of other colors, and other illumination elements 312 are disposed around the center. They are arranged at equal intervals in a concentric shape.

302係反射鏡單元,於前端連接以例如45度角度配置之平面鏡303,在後端於可插入連接於攝影機單元309之外周且可進行交換之狀態下形成有圓筒部305。攝影機單元309之外形與反射鏡單元302之圓筒部305之內形較佳為形成為橢圓狀,且設定為於插入裝著時不進行旋轉。The 302-type mirror unit is connected to a flat mirror 303 which is disposed at an angle of, for example, 45 degrees at the front end, and has a cylindrical portion 305 formed in a state where the rear end is insertably connectable to the outer periphery of the camera unit 309 and can be exchanged. The outer shape of the outer surface of the camera unit 309 and the cylindrical portion 305 of the mirror unit 302 is preferably formed in an elliptical shape, and is set so as not to rotate when inserted.

反射鏡單元302可適時進行交換,圖3(b)為裝著有具備平面鏡303之反射鏡單元之狀態、圖3(c)為設定有球面狀之凸面鏡308之反射鏡單元310與攝影機單元309插入結合之狀態。The mirror unit 302 can be exchanged in a timely manner. Fig. 3(b) shows the mirror unit 310 having the mirror unit 303, and the mirror unit 310 and the camera unit 309 having the spherical mirror 308 set in Fig. 3(c). Insert the state of the union.

如上所述,於攝影全齒之情形時,使用連接有圖3(c)之凸面鏡308之反射鏡單元310,利用攝影機單元309之攝影機313攝影凸面鏡308之凸面反射映像,照明用元件312之輸出光係於凸面鏡308進行反射,照射口腔內之觀察部位。攝影機313可例示CCD樣式、C-MOS樣式等,解析度較佳為更高影像質量,但於以動態影像為主體之情形時,亦可使影像質量較低而進行使用。As described above, in the case of photographing full teeth, the mirror unit 310 to which the convex mirror 308 of Fig. 3(c) is attached is used, and the convex reflection map of the convex mirror 308 is photographed by the camera 313 of the camera unit 309, and the output of the illumination element 312 is output. The light is reflected by the convex mirror 308 to illuminate the observation site in the oral cavity. The camera 313 can be exemplified by a CCD pattern, a C-MOS pattern, etc., and the resolution is preferably higher image quality. However, when the motion picture is mainly used, the image quality can be lowered and used.

於普通之攝影之情形時,將圖3(b)所示之裝著有平面鏡303之反射鏡單元之圓筒部305插入攝影機單元309之外周使其結合使用。In the case of ordinary photography, the cylindrical portion 305 of the mirror unit with the mirror 303 shown in Fig. 3(b) is inserted into the outer periphery of the camera unit 309 to be used in combination.

304為導線,可利用專用電導線或通用USB纜線等。304 is a wire, and a dedicated electric wire or a universal USB cable can be used.

306、307為操作按鈕,為1至複數之按壓式、旋轉式、該等之複合式等按鈕,於本實施例中,表示2個。進行電源之接通斷開等攝影機之操作,除此以外亦有具備按壓該操作按鈕307而操作顯示於經由導線304連接之電腦314之螢幕314A之選擇、操作用顯示窗口之GUI(圖形使用者介面)功能之情形。306 and 307 are operation buttons, and are buttons of 1 to a plurality of push type, rotary type, and the like, and in the present embodiment, two are shown. In addition to the operation of the camera such as turning the power on and off, there is also a GUI (graphic user) that controls the selection of the screen 314A and the operation display window that is pressed by the operation button 307 and is displayed on the computer 314 connected via the wire 304. Interface) function situation.

例如,於單位影像之順序決定之後,自動地按照順序進行排序之情形時,可操作該操作按鈕306、307而執行。For example, when the order of the unit images is automatically sorted in order, the operation buttons 306 and 307 can be operated and executed.

例如,亦可將306設為相當於滑鼠之左擊功能之按鈕,將307設為相當於右擊之按鈕。For example, 306 may be set as a button corresponding to the left click function of the mouse, and 307 may be set as a button corresponding to a right click.

314為電腦,例示與螢幕(顯示器)314A形成一體式者。除此以外,亦可為作為專用裝置之組合。314 is a computer, and the example is integrated with the screen (display) 314A. In addition to this, it can also be a combination of dedicated devices.

315為鍵盤,316係電腦用之滑鼠。任一者均用於電腦操作,進而亦兼有用以操作口腔內攝影機之開關。315 is the keyboard, 316 is the computer mouse. Either one is used for computer operation, and is also useful for operating a switch in an intraoral camera.

又,317為印表機,由噴墨方式、雷射方式之彩色印表機等形成,於對患者印刷並提供患者之口腔內影像時使用。Further, 317 is a printer, and is formed by an ink jet method or a laser type color printer, and is used when printing a patient and providing an intra-oral image of a patient.

圖3(d)係表示使用凹面鏡311之反射鏡單元318作為反射鏡者,於需要例如放大之影像之情形時使用。又,亦有如下之情形:於口腔內之情形時,當自齒列僅放大地攝影內側時,於靠近平面鏡之方向上調整凹面鏡311之曲率,自略微遠離齒列之部位進行攝影,藉此獲取本發明中所示之廣範圍之影像。Fig. 3(d) shows the use of the mirror unit 318 of the concave mirror 311 as a mirror, which is used when, for example, an enlarged image is required. Further, in the case of the oral cavity, when the inner side of the dentition is only magnified, the curvature of the concave mirror 311 is adjusted in the direction close to the plane mirror, and the photograph is taken from a portion slightly away from the dentition. A wide range of images as shown in the present invention are obtained.

於本發明中,亦有不僅僅齒列,亦將口舌、唇、齒齦等作為廣範圍影像、單位影像進行處理之情形。In the present invention, there are cases in which not only the dentition but also the tongue, the lip, the gums, and the like are handled as a wide range of images and unit images.

例如,將亦成為舌癌之表現之息肉顯示為單位影像,而進行診療說明之情形等時之本發明係可較佳地利用。For example, the present invention, which is also a manifestation of tongue cancer, is displayed as a unit image, and the present invention is preferably used when the medical treatment is described.

繼而,將用以形成全齒影像之一例示於圖6中。Next, one of the images used to form the full-tooth image is illustrated in FIG.

使用之攝影機係使用如圖3(b)所示之使用平面鏡303之反射鏡單元302者。The camera used is a mirror unit 302 using a mirror 303 as shown in Fig. 3(b).

又,影像既可為靜態數位影像攝影,亦可為數位動畫攝影。Moreover, the image can be either a static digital image or a digital animation.

再者,於自動畫數位影像獲得複數之靜態影像之情形時,由於為動畫攝影用,故像素數相對變小,因此較佳為利用自動快門一面移動一面攝影靜態影像。Furthermore, in the case where a plurality of still images are obtained by automatically drawing a digital image, since the number of pixels is relatively small for the purpose of animated photographing, it is preferable to photograph a still image while moving with an automatic shutter.

一面使反射鏡單元302之平面鏡303自攝影面601向612方向移動,一面對圖6(a)所示之下顎600之全齒進行攝影。數位動畫攝影之情形係與以30張/秒之程度輸入靜態影像之情形相同,因此若使數位動畫攝影用之口腔內攝影機之反射鏡部分自圖6(a)之攝影面601沿著612之軌跡移動,則可求得多數之靜態影像。再者,靜態影像連續攝影較利用動畫攝影之靜態影像取得,像素數更多,解析度更高,因此於自該全齒影像取得各個齒之影像之情形時成為較佳之態樣。The plane mirror 303 of the mirror unit 302 is moved from the photographing surface 601 to the direction 612, and a full tooth of the lower surface 600 shown in Fig. 6(a) is photographed. The case of digital animation photography is the same as the case of inputting a still image at a rate of 30 frames per second. Therefore, if the mirror portion of the intraoral camera for digital animation photography is used, the photographic surface 601 of FIG. 6(a) is along 612. When the track moves, a large number of still images can be obtained. Furthermore, continuous image capture of still images is obtained by using still images of animated photographs, and the number of pixels is larger and the resolution is higher. Therefore, it is preferable to obtain an image of each tooth from the full-tooth image.

圖6(b)表示進行圖6(a)所示之攝影之情形時之各個影像之一部分。613係影像601與602之共通部分影像,614係影像602與603之共通部分影像,615係影像603與604之共通部分影像。Fig. 6(b) shows a part of each image in the case where the photographing shown in Fig. 6(a) is performed. 613 is a common partial image of images 601 and 602, 614 is a common partial image of images 602 and 603, and 615 is a common partial image of images 603 and 604.

除此以外,以604與605、605與606、606與607、607與608、608與609、609與610、610與611、611與612之各者亦獲得共通部分影像之方式進行攝影。In addition, photographs are taken in such a manner that each of 604 and 605, 605 and 606, 606 and 607, 607 and 608, 608 and 609, 609 and 610, 610 and 611, 611 and 612 also obtain a common partial image.

例如,於使該等影像二值化,而獲得輪廓之狀態下,以於影像間一致之方式重疊共通部分之輪廓。進而,依序與影像605、606、607、608、609、610、611、612進行攝影並影像化,根據相互之共通部將各個影像連結,獲得全齒影像。全景狀之咬合面影像可藉由公知之全景合成軟體而形成,於因手持引起之搖動產生影響之情形時,有為了於合成前修正影像,較佳為進行仿射轉換處理之情形。For example, in a state in which the images are binarized to obtain a contour, the contour of the common portion is superimposed so that the images are uniform. Further, the images 605, 606, 607, 608, 609, 610, 611, and 612 are sequentially photographed and visualized, and the respective images are connected based on the common portions of each other to obtain a full-tooth image. The panoramic occlusal image can be formed by a well-known panoramic synthetic software. When the shaking caused by the hand is affected, it is preferable to perform affine conversion processing for correcting the image before synthesis.

繼而,參照圖2詳細地說明實施例之動作。Next, the operation of the embodiment will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

藉由口腔內影像攝影手段11攝影口腔內之例如上顎全齒。將所攝影之影像之位置示於圖2(a)中。For example, the upper jaw of the oral cavity is photographed by the intraoral imaging means 11. The position of the image to be photographed is shown in Fig. 2(a).

口腔內影像攝影手段11係至少牙科醫師知道包含作為診療對象之齒,且其相當於口腔內之哪一部分之影像即可。The intra-oral imaging means 11 is a method in which at least the dentist knows which part of the oral cavity is included as the tooth to be diagnosed.

圖2(a)所示之影像係藉由例如圖3(c)所示之口腔內攝影單元進行攝影所得者,亦可進而進行校準,修正畸變。又,口腔內影像攝影手段11並非一定為全齒,亦有為部分齒之情形或一個齒之情形。圖2(a)表示上顎20,亦有全齒及硬口蓋部亦被攝影,亦一併進行該部位之診療之情形。The image shown in Fig. 2(a) is obtained by photographing, for example, the intraoral imaging unit shown in Fig. 3(c), and may be further calibrated to correct the distortion. Further, the intraoral imaging means 11 is not necessarily a full tooth, but may be a partial tooth or a tooth. Fig. 2(a) shows the upper jaw 20, and the full-toothed and hard-mouthed parts are also photographed, and the diagnosis and treatment of the part is also performed.

繼而,藉由診療部位檢測手段12,自動或手動地抽取需要進行診療、改善之部位。於手動地檢測之情形時,與繪圖軟體同樣地,使用滑鼠以圓或四角形進行指定,進行拷貝、切割等,進而,藉由貼附作業將其貼附。Then, the part to be diagnosed and improved is automatically or manually extracted by the medical site detecting means 12. In the case of manual detection, similarly to the drawing software, the mouse is designated in a circle or a square shape, copied, cut, etc., and attached by a bonding operation.

圖2(a)之20a、20b及20c表示對作為對象之齒藉由繪圖軟體手動或自動地指示顯示顯著之色彩之圓之狀態。20a, 20b, and 20c of Fig. 2(a) show a state in which a tooth that is a subject is manually or automatically indicated by a drawing software to display a circle of a remarkable color.

手動地指示顯示係操作例如附屬於電腦之滑鼠、鍵盤而描繪圓、四角形、其他輪廓圖形等之內部經穿透處理者,自動地指示顯示係例如若於畫面上利用滑鼠於指定部位具有指標並按壓按鈕,則顯示既定半徑之圓或既定面積之四角形等之內部經穿透處理者。An internal transmissive processor that manually instructs a display system operation, such as a mouse attached to a keyboard of a computer to draw a circle, a quadrangle, other contour graphics, etc., automatically indicates that the display system has, for example, a mouse on the screen at a designated location. When the indicator is pressed and the button is pressed, an internal penetrating processor such as a circle of a predetermined radius or a square of a predetermined area is displayed.

繼而,利用單位影像形成手段13,將圖2(c)中所示之所指定之齒20a調整為單位影像21。Then, the specified tooth 20a shown in FIG. 2(c) is adjusted to the unit image 21 by the unit image forming means 13.

此時,附加設定例如於決定治療之順序之後記入順序之順序欄21a、例如於決定治療開始之後進行記入之診療開始日期欄21b、記入形成何種診療之說明欄21c。In this case, the additional setting is, for example, the order column 21a in which the order is determined after the order of the treatment is determined, for example, the medical treatment start date column 21b in which the medical treatment is started after the start of the treatment, and the description column 21c in which the medical treatment is formed.

將該最短診療日期顯示於例如圖2之順序最早之單位影像之診療開始日期欄21b。於對於該日期患者同意之情形時,向決定輸入手段155移動,決定該日期,利用記錄手段156向患者之資料庫記錄。The shortest medical treatment date is displayed, for example, in the medical treatment start date column 21b of the unit image in which the order of FIG. 2 is the earliest. When the patient agrees to the date, the decision input means 155 is moved, and the date is determined, and the recording means 156 is used to record the data to the patient's database.

於患者不同意之情形時,利用空閒診療日期顯示手段154以如日曆形式般之二維形式顯示空閒診療日期。When the patient does not agree, the idle medical treatment date display means 154 displays the date of the idle medical treatment in a two-dimensional form as in the form of a calendar.

該顯示採用一覽表形、手翻頁形等計劃表顯示之方法,為至少患者容易明白之顯示即可。The display is displayed by a schedule such as a list form or a hand-turned page, and is displayed at least for the patient to easily understand.

再者,不僅需要日期,亦需要時間,因此較佳為亦一併進行時鐘顯示。若根據該顯示,同意診療開始日期,則利用決定輸入手段155輸入上述日期,並利用記錄手段156記錄於資料庫中。Furthermore, not only the date but also the time is required, so it is preferable to display the clock together. When the diagnosis start date is agreed based on the display, the date is input by the decision input means 155, and is recorded in the database by the recording means 156.

向下一順序之單位影像移動並決定記入相同之診療開始日期。The unit image of the next order is moved and decided to be credited to the same medical start date.

如上所述之診療日期之計劃表操作係因本發明於設定複數之診療預定日期時,於短暫性之診療中,必需避免與未產生之其他患者之計劃表之混同,故而對計劃表明確化有效。The planning operation of the medical treatment date as described above is based on the present invention in setting a plurality of medical treatment scheduled dates, and in the transient medical treatment, it is necessary to avoid confusion with the schedules of other patients that are not generated, so that the schedule is clarified. effective.

再者,亦可針對每個齒將ID編號記入任一欄中。該欄中表示資料庫中使用之輸入用框顯示等,診療日期可根據其他患者之診療計劃表自動地決定空閒之日期,因此亦可於顯示有單位影像之時間點,根據其他患者之資料,顯示空閒之時間。Furthermore, the ID number can be entered in any column for each tooth. This column indicates the input box used in the database, etc. The date of diagnosis can be automatically determined according to the schedule of other patients' treatment plans. Therefore, it can also be based on the data of other patients when the unit image is displayed. Shows the time of idle.

關於該等框內之顯示內容,治療前之影像至少有顯示治療順序之欄即可,或亦可對各者附加識別符號而將其顯示。Regarding the display contents in the frames, the image before the treatment may have at least a column showing the order of treatment, or may be displayed by adding an identification symbol to each of them.

圖2(d)係表示圖2(a)之診療用之齒20b之單位影像22,圖2(e)分別表示圖2(a)之診療用之齒20c之單位影像23。Fig. 2(d) shows the unit image 22 of the tooth 20b for diagnosis and treatment of Fig. 2(a), and Fig. 2(e) shows the unit image 23 of the tooth 20c for diagnosis and treatment of Fig. 2(a), respectively.

於單位影像22中,一體地顯示順序欄22a、診療開始日期欄22b、說明欄22c,圖2(e)亦同樣地,於單位影像23中一體地顯示順序欄23a,診療開始日期欄23b、說明欄23c。In the unit video 22, the order column 22a, the medical treatment start date column 22b, and the explanation column 22c are integrally displayed, and similarly, in the unit video 23, the sequence column 23a is displayed integrally, and the medical treatment start date column 23b, Description column 23c.

再者,進行確定時,按壓確定按鈕(包含畫面上顯示之虛擬按鈕)。亦可藉由按壓確定按鈕,沿著順序記入欄之編號,排序地顯示,藉由使該作業自動化,可縮短最終交付給患者之用紙之製成時間。Furthermore, when the determination is made, the OK button (including the virtual button displayed on the screen) is pressed. By pressing the OK button, the number of the column can be sequentially displayed in order, and by automating the job, the time for finalizing the paper delivered to the patient can be shortened.

圖2所示之圖亦存在表示整體顯示於一個電腦之螢幕之狀態之情形,於該情形時,亦存在已兼有顯示輸出手段16之操作範圍之情形。The figure shown in Fig. 2 also shows a situation in which the entire screen is displayed on the screen of a computer. In this case, there is also a case where the operation range of the display output means 16 is combined.

利用診療順序設定手段14,牙醫單獨或牙醫與患者一面商量一面決定並記入順序欄22a之順序。同樣地利用診療說明形成手段15記入診療開始日期欄22b、說明欄22c。該記入包含較多之專用內容,因此亦有牙醫預先單獨進行之情形。Using the diagnosis order setting means 14, the dentist alone or the dentist consults with the patient side to determine and record the order of the sequence column 22a. Similarly, the medical treatment instruction forming means 15 is used to record the medical treatment start date column 22b and the explanation column 22c. This credit contains more special content, so there are cases where the dentist performs it separately.

顯示輸出手段16於電腦畫面上形成所確定之複數之單位影像與揭示有全齒影像之狀態,並進行顯示。The display output means 16 forms a unit image of the determined plural number on the computer screen and displays the state of the full-tooth image, and displays it.

該顯示輸出手段16較佳為於牙科診療時等進行之情形時,顯示於一畫面上。The display output means 16 is preferably displayed on a screen when the dental treatment or the like is performed.

然而,於單位影像較多之情形時,亦進行捲動,或者視需要進行縮小,或亦可顯示為拇指甲狀。However, when there are many unit images, scrolling is performed, or it may be reduced as needed, or may be displayed as a thumb.

進而,所確定之顯示輸出手段16中之影像亦可藉由印表機,印字於用紙,而散發給患者。患者以影像持有患者之口腔內,藉此可期待為了謀求口腔內之健全化而進行門診治療。繼而,診療結束後,再次如圖1所示進行口腔內之攝影。Further, the image in the determined display output means 16 can also be distributed to the patient by printing on the printer by means of a printer. The patient holds the patient's mouth in the image, and expects to perform outpatient treatment for the purpose of improving the oral cavity. Then, after the end of the medical treatment, the photography in the oral cavity is performed again as shown in FIG.

將相同部位之齒20a作為單位影像24進行如圖2(b)所示之影像顯示。24d為診療部位,24a係自例如利用診療順序設定手段14預先設定有診療順序之影像資料中檢索相同之影像資料,此時進行所顯示之順序顯示。The tooth 20a of the same portion is displayed as a unit image 24 as shown in Fig. 2(b). 24d is a medical treatment site, and 24a searches for the same video data from the image data in which the medical treatment sequence is set in advance by, for example, the medical treatment order setting means 14. In this case, the displayed order is displayed.

24b預先記載有例如利用診療說明形成手段15進行診療時之記錄事項等。For example, a record item at the time of medical treatment using the medical treatment instruction forming means 15 is described in advance.

而且,圖2(a)所示之診療後之單位影像係診療前之單位影像且顯示於與相同者鄰接之部位,可辨別對牙醫之信任或用於保養經診療後之牙齒之門診治療的時序。24c係例如診療後之說明欄,更佳為用以與患者商量下一診療之開始之說明欄。Moreover, the unit image image after the diagnosis and treatment shown in Fig. 2(a) is displayed in a position adjacent to the same person, and the trust of the dentist or the outpatient treatment for the teeth after the treatment can be discerned. Timing. The 24c is, for example, a description column after the diagnosis, and is more preferably a description column for discussing the start of the next treatment with the patient.

繼而,利用顯示輸出手段16,藉由印表機將例如如圖4之400所示之4張影像印字於一張用紙並交付給患者,對患者提供繼續診療之必要性。Then, by using the display output means 16, the four images shown in, for example, 400 of FIG. 4 are printed on a sheet of paper and delivered to the patient by the printer, thereby providing the patient with the necessity of continuing the medical treatment.

再者,400中未揭示有圖2(a)所示之口腔內廣範圍影像,但較佳為揭示廣範圍影像,使診療部位明確,藉此可獲得患者之進一步之理解。Furthermore, the wide-range image of the oral cavity shown in FIG. 2(a) is not disclosed in 400, but it is preferable to disclose a wide-range image to make the diagnosis site clear, thereby obtaining further understanding of the patient.

圖2、圖4之各顯示欄為例,每一單位影像之顯示欄之數量、顯示內容亦根據治療之目的、計劃表等而適當選擇。For each of the display columns of FIG. 2 and FIG. 4, the number and display content of the display columns of each unit image are appropriately selected according to the purpose of treatment, the schedule, and the like.

[實施例2][Embodiment 2]

繼而,將另一實施例示於圖5而進行說明。Next, another embodiment will be described with reference to FIG. 5.

51係廣範圍影像輸入手段,為用以攝影口腔內之上顎之全齒、下顎之全齒之手段,藉由利用攝影機攝影例如放映於圖3之(c)所示之凸面鏡之全齒而獲得廣範圍影像,或者亦可自如圖6所示之連續攝影、構成數位動畫之靜態影像合成共通部分,而進行全齒影像之形成。The 51-series wide-range image input means is a means for photographing the full teeth of the upper jaw and the lower jaw of the upper jaw of the oral cavity, and is obtained by photographing the full teeth of the convex mirror shown in (c) of FIG. 3 by using a camera. A wide-range image, or a continuous image of the continuous image and a static image constituting the digital animation as shown in FIG. 6, can be used to form a full-tooth image.

52係牙齒檢測手段,為自利用廣範圍影像輸入手段51所獲得之齒列中抽取各個齒之影像資料之手段。抽取係除例如藉由輪廓抽取程式進而於其周邊僅抽取既定範圍而形成一個齒之影像之手段以外,亦可採用使用圖3(b)所示之平面鏡攝影各個齒而進行一影像化之手段,亦有自全齒影像或口腔內廣範圍影像中切割單位影像,而形成一個齒之影像之手段更合理且更佳之情形。The 52-series tooth detecting means is a means for extracting image data of each tooth from the tooth row obtained by the wide-area image input means 51. In addition to the means for forming a tooth image by extracting a predetermined range from the periphery, for example, by means of a contour extraction program, a method of imaging each tooth using a plane mirror as shown in FIG. 3(b) may be employed. It is also possible to cut a unit image from a full-tooth image or a wide-range image in the oral cavity, and a means of forming a tooth image is more reasonable and better.

53係單位影像形成手段,為用以分別對利用牙齒檢測手段52所獲得之各個影像附加順序記入欄、診療說明記入欄等,而形成顯示用之影像者。The 53-unit unit image forming means is a method for forming a video for display by adding a sequence entry column, a medical treatment explanation entry column, and the like to each of the images obtained by the tooth detecting means 52.

進而,較佳為形成齒用之資料庫,附加固有之記號而進行管理。Furthermore, it is preferable to form a database for teeth, and to manage by adding a unique symbol.

54係診療影像選擇手段,為用以自影像中選擇蛀牙、缺損等成為診療對象之牙齒之手段,牙科醫師亦可目視或讀出先前登錄之資料並進行比較,根據顏色、形狀等差異選擇作為診療對象之齒。The 54-series diagnosis and treatment image selection means is a means for selecting a tooth to be diagnosed from a video, such as a tooth decay or a defect, and the dentist can visually or read the previously registered data and compare it, and select according to the difference in color, shape, and the like. The teeth of the subject.

55係診療順序設定手段,牙科醫師單獨決定進行診療之牙齒之順序,除此以外患者亦可與牙科醫師根據放映於電腦之螢幕(例如圖3(a)之螢幕314A)或所印字印刷之影像,進行商量而決定。The 55 series of medical treatment order setting means, the dentist can determine the order of the teeth to be diagnosed separately, and the patient can also be printed with the dentist according to the screen displayed on the computer (for example, screen 314A of Fig. 3 (a)) or printed image. It is decided by consultation.

56係診療說明形成手段,牙科醫師單獨或根據與患者之商量記入診療之期間、開始日期、及診療之內容、改善之必要性等,或者亦可顯示利用與先前之資料之比較之根據其差之大小而預先所記錄之說明。The 56 Department of Medical Treatment describes the means of formation. The dentist can record the period of diagnosis and treatment, the start date, the content of the treatment, the necessity of improvement, etc., either alone or according to the consultation with the patient, or may also show the difference between the use and the previous data. The size of the description is recorded in advance.

57係顯示輸出手段,亦可供用以將成為上述診療對象之顯示影像顯示於1張用紙,或顯示於電腦之螢幕(例如圖3(a)之314A),而獲得患者之同意與理解之說明。又,印刷於用紙之影像係提供給患者,作為今後之診療計劃表,而實現繼續之牙科診療。The 57-series display output means can also be used to display the display image to be the subject of the above-mentioned diagnosis on one sheet of paper or on a screen of a computer (for example, 314A in Fig. 3(a)), and obtain the consent and understanding of the patient. . In addition, the image printed on the paper is provided to the patient, and the dental treatment plan is continued as a future medical treatment plan.

58係記錄手段,作為病歷或作為資料庫而進行記錄,或亦可上載於伺服器之患者專用之儲存區域中,或將齒影像資料記錄於患者之行動電話之記錄部中。The 58-series recording means records as a medical record or as a database, or may be uploaded to a patient-dedicated storage area of the server, or record the tooth image data in the recording unit of the patient's mobile phone.

繼而,參照圖7說明圖5所示之實施例之動作。Next, the operation of the embodiment shown in Fig. 5 will be described with reference to Fig. 7 .

自患者之口腔內利用廣範圍影像輸入手段51攝影全齒,形成一張或由複數張所構成之全齒之影像資料700(圖7(a))。表示全齒之影像資料700可將連結圖6所示之靜態影像而形成者作為一例。The full-toothed image is taken from the patient's mouth using a wide range of image input means 51 to form one or a plurality of full-toothed image data 700 (Fig. 7(a)). The image data 700 indicating the full tooth can be formed by connecting the still image shown in FIG. 6 as an example.

自所獲得之廣範圍影像資料700,藉由牙齒檢測手段52手動或自動地形成齒影像。From the wide range of image data 700 obtained, the tooth image is manually or automatically formed by the tooth detecting means 52.

作為自動地檢測齒之方法,藉由輪廓抽取程式輪廓抽取口腔內之影像資料,分別檢測齒之輪廓。As a method of automatically detecting the teeth, the image data in the oral cavity is extracted by the contour extraction program contour, and the contours of the teeth are respectively detected.

於該情形時,於輪廓不完全之情形時,檢測其數點,並形成通過該數點之虛擬圓。由於可將該虛擬圓視作一個齒之位置,故自所設想之中心進而將半徑僅擴大既定值,以四角面之形式將其範圍作為一個齒之影像而抽取。In this case, when the contour is incomplete, the number of points is detected and a virtual circle passing through the number is formed. Since the virtual circle can be regarded as the position of one tooth, the radius is only expanded from the center of the assumption, and the range is extracted as an image of the tooth in the form of a square face.

將所抽取之影像示於例如圖7(b)。相對於齒71為齒影像701,相對於齒72為齒影像702,相對於齒73為齒影像703。The extracted image is shown, for example, in Fig. 7(b). The tooth image 701 is a tooth image 701 with respect to the tooth 71, and is a tooth image 702 with respect to the tooth 72, and is a tooth image 703 with respect to the tooth 73.

繼而,利用單位影像形成手段53,與識別碼等患者之資訊建立關聯而對該等齒之影像進行單位影像化(圖7(c))。於單位影像74中,揭示有齒影像701及用以記入診療順序等之顯示欄704。Then, the unit image forming means 53 associates the information of the patient such as the identification code with the unit image of the images of the teeth (Fig. 7(c)). In the unit image 74, the tooth image 701 and the display field 704 for recording the medical procedure and the like are disclosed.

於單位影像75中,揭示有齒影像702與顯示欄705,於單位影像76中,揭示有齒影像703與顯示欄706。In the unit image 75, the tooth image 702 and the display field 705 are revealed, and in the unit image 76, the tooth image 703 and the display field 706 are revealed.

該等單位影像係記錄於預先所設定之患者資料庫中而形成患者之上下口腔內資料清單。The unit images are recorded in a pre-set patient database to form a list of the upper and lower oral data of the patient.

利用診療影像選擇手段54,自其中目視或自動地抽取表示成為診療或改善對象之牙齒影像之單位影像77(圖7(d))。The unit image 77 indicating the image of the tooth to be treated or improved is visually or automatically extracted from the medical image selection means 54 (Fig. 7(d)).

分別利用具有與圖1相同之構成且進行相同之動作之診療順序設定手段55及診療說明形成手段56,牙科醫師單獨或較佳為與患者一面觀察攝影於電腦螢幕之單位齒影像,一面記入診療順序等。The medical treatment order setting means 55 and the medical treatment instruction forming means 56 having the same configuration as that of Fig. 1 and performing the same operation are used, and the dentist individually or preferably observes the unit tooth image photographed on the computer screen with the patient and records the medical treatment. Order and so on.

而且,於診療順序決定,且寫入有診療開始日期等之階段中,於顯示輸出手段57中,亦可於電腦之螢幕78中顯示例如顯示有如圖7(e)所示之順序之單位影像之排列、或於如圖7(f)所示進而包含廣範圍影像進行編輯之狀態下進行顯示,可形成患者獲得診療之辨別、及對繼續之診療獲得同意之狀況。Further, in the stage in which the medical treatment order is determined and the medical treatment start date or the like is written, in the display output means 57, for example, a unit image in which the order shown in Fig. 7(e) is displayed can be displayed on the screen 78 of the computer. The arrangement or display is performed in a state in which a wide range of images are further edited as shown in FIG. 7(f), and the patient can obtain the diagnosis of the diagnosis and the consent of the continued diagnosis and treatment.

單位影像707、708、709及710較佳為按照治療開始之順序排列。圖7(f)係包含例如全齒影像資料711之畫面顯示或患者攜帶之經印刷物化之齒資料79。The unit images 707, 708, 709, and 710 are preferably arranged in the order in which the treatment is started. Fig. 7(f) is a screen display containing, for example, full-tooth image data 711 or printed materialized data 79 carried by the patient.

記錄手段58係將該等單位影像記錄於資料庫中,適當利用於其他患者之計劃表之調整。The recording means 58 records the unit images in a database and appropriately uses the adjustment of the schedule of other patients.

又,本發明係於取得廣範圍影像時,亦可合併使用圖3所示之凸面鏡之方法或使反射鏡沿著齒列移動,結合靜態影像而獲得之方法形成一張影像。Moreover, in the present invention, when a wide range of images are obtained, a method of using the convex mirror shown in FIG. 3 or moving the mirror along the dentition and combining the still images to form a single image may be used.

即,僅將齒列視為靜態影像,使用凸面反射鏡攝影舌之部位,進行影像合成,藉此獲得具有無畸變之齒列之口腔內廣範圍影像。That is, only the tooth row is regarded as a still image, and the portion of the tongue is photographed using a convex mirror, and image synthesis is performed, thereby obtaining a wide-range image of the oral cavity having the distortion-free dentition.

進而,圖8至圖12中表示於將齒嚙合之狀態下明瞭地進行合成而形成全景狀之齒列之全景齒列影像形成方法之一例。Further, FIG. 8 to FIG. 12 show an example of a method of forming a panoramic dentition image in which a tooth row of a panoramic shape is formed by combining the teeth in a state in which the teeth are meshed.

如圖8所示,採用藉由攝影機,攝影自左內側攝影所得之影像直至中央附近為止,改變口腔內攝影機之方向,自右內側至中央附近為止連攝攝影之方法,於該情形時,為了暫時改變攝影機之方向而攝影狀態中斷,因此多數情況下左右之齒列影像之合成無法準確地進行,而發生偏移。As shown in Fig. 8, in the case where the image obtained by photographing from the left inner side is photographed by the camera until the vicinity of the center, the direction of the camera in the oral cavity is changed, and the method of photographing is taken from the right inner side to the vicinity of the center, in this case, Since the direction of the camera is temporarily changed and the photographing state is interrupted, in many cases, the synthesis of the left and right dentition images cannot be accurately performed, and the shift occurs.

又,利用手動之攝影機之移動攝影係於例如臼齒之攝影之情形時,為了配置於口腔內內面之頰肉與齒側面間,且於推開該頰肉般之狀態下使口腔內攝影機移動,或形成與齒側面之接觸狀態等,頰肉、齒側面成為支承口腔內攝影機之反射鏡或攝影機之攝影部位之狀態,若使口腔內攝影機向前齒方向移動,則自因頰肉引起之壓迫等解放,成為手持狀態進行攝影之攝影機之位置變得不穩定,從而影像容易變得混亂。尤其,有攝影機與作為被攝體之齒側面之距離發生變動或攝影方向出現晃動,而作為被攝體之牙齒之大小發生變動或影像產生畸變之情形。Moreover, when the mobile photography using a manual camera is used, for example, in the case of dental caries, the intraoral camera is moved in order to be placed between the buccal meat and the flank of the inner surface of the oral cavity, and the cheek-like state is pushed open. Or forming a state of contact with the side of the tooth, etc., the cheek meat, the side of the tooth becomes a state of supporting the mirror of the camera in the oral cavity or the photographing part of the camera, and if the camera in the oral cavity is moved in the direction of the front tooth, it is caused by the cheek meat. The liberation of oppression and the like, the position of the camera that is in the state of hand-held photography becomes unstable, and the image is easily confused. In particular, there is a case where the distance between the camera and the tooth side surface of the subject is changed or the photographing direction is shaken, and the size of the tooth as the subject is changed or the image is distorted.

使用圖8所示之反射鏡之口腔內攝影機901係例示圖3所示之構成,為於模組狀之CCD攝影機、C-MOS攝影機之周邊排列複數之光源用LED之構成,為經由反射鏡,對口腔內進行利用光源用LED之照明,並且連攝地獲得口腔內之齒列等影像者,為可自臼齒穩定地進行攝影者,但並不限定於此,亦有亦可為未使用反射鏡之直接攝影用之攝影機之情形。The intraoral camera 901 using the mirror shown in FIG. 8 is a configuration shown in FIG. 3, and is configured by arranging a plurality of LEDs for a light source around a module-shaped CCD camera or a C-MOS camera. In the case where the light source LED is used for illumination in the oral cavity, and the image such as the dentition in the oral cavity is obtained in a continuous manner, the photographer can stably perform the self-clamping, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and may be unused. The case of a camera for direct photography of a mirror.

此處使用之口腔內攝影機901係例示具備如下構成者:在於前端具備攝影單元905(圖3之309)之本體904(圖3之301)之前端可交換地裝著使用具備平面狀之反射鏡902(圖3之303)之反射鏡單元903(圖3之302),上述攝影單元905係組合CCD攝影機、C-MOS攝影機等攝像器與於攝像器之周圍配置4~8個左右發光二極體所得之照明器而獲得。The intraoral camera 901 used here is exemplified by a mirror having a planar shape in which a front end of a main body 904 (301 of FIG. 3) including a photographing unit 905 (309 of FIG. 3) is exchangeably mounted. 902 (303 of FIG. 3) mirror unit 903 (302 of FIG. 3), the photographing unit 905 is a combination of a camera such as a CCD camera or a C-MOS camera, and four to eight light-emitting diodes are disposed around the camera. Obtained from the body of the illuminator.

攝影單元905係例示使用以於例如每秒10張至30張之範圍內獲得影像之方式攝影靜態影像之連攝方法而輸出靜態影像數位影像者。The photographing unit 905 exemplifies a method of outputting a still image digital image by using a continuous shooting method of photographing a still image to obtain an image in a range of, for example, 10 to 30 frames per second.

於開始連攝攝影之前,預先於將上下之齒嚙合之狀態下之齒列900a之中央附近附加標記ML,標記ML較佳為藉由攝影機攝影可鮮明地將所著色之封件之暫時附著、利用可去掉顏色之著色筆之記載等顯示於影像者。將標記ML附加於例如齒列之中心附近時之中心附近係表示連攝攝影左右之齒列後,進行合成時之成為基準之場所者,除此以外,亦可於所攝影之影像之中央附近,檢測在影像處理上成為特徵之部位,將上述部位設定於標記影像上。標記ML較佳為以覆蓋上齒與下齒之方式進行配置。Before the start of the continuous shooting, the mark ML is added in advance in the vicinity of the center of the tooth row 900a in the state in which the upper and lower teeth are engaged, and the mark ML is preferably such that the colored seal can be temporarily attached by the camera. It is displayed on the image by the record of the color pen that can remove the color. When the marker ML is attached to, for example, the vicinity of the center of the center of the dentition, it indicates the position of the dentition on the left and right of the photographic lens, and the reference is made at the time of the synthesis, and may be in the vicinity of the center of the image to be photographed. A part that is characteristic in image processing is detected, and the above-mentioned part is set on the mark image. The mark ML is preferably arranged to cover the upper and lower teeth.

自臼齒之位置例如906a之狀態如906b、906c般沿著齒面,較佳為距離齒列面相同之距離進行該連攝動作,手持本體904,移動反射鏡902而進行攝影。The position of the molars, for example, the state of 906a, such as 906b, 906c, along the tooth surface, preferably at the same distance from the tooth surface, performs the continuous shooting operation, and the hand body 904 moves the mirror 902 to perform photography.

IG係修正用顯示部,為可對以可剝離之狀態附著於齒表面之貼附構件進行為影像修正用之例如井字形、四角形、三角形、網格、其他圖形且根據影像之畸變、攝影機與齒側面間之距離之影像之大小等修正之顯示即可,又,修正用顯示部IG之顏色亦為綠色,除此以外若為附加有於影像處理中可識別之色彩者,則並不限定於綠色。The IG-based correction display unit is configured to perform image correction for a patch member attached to the tooth surface in a peelable state, for example, a trapezoidal shape, a quadrangle, a triangle, a mesh, or other patterns, and according to image distortion, a camera and It is only necessary to correct the size of the image of the distance between the sides of the teeth, and the color of the correction display unit IG is also green, and if it is a color that can be recognized in the image processing, it is not limited. In green.

該貼附構件亦可貼附於例如如圖8、圖10所示為齒之中央且附加有標記ML之牙齒之表面,又,亦有如下之情形:貼附之齒並不限定於一個齒,亦可於複數之齒貼附貼附構件而進行攝影,亦可附加於其他齒中之於口腔內無其他支承,而手動地攝影齒之部位。The attaching member may be attached to, for example, the surface of the tooth having the mark ML attached to the center of the tooth as shown in FIGS. 8 and 10, and also has the following condition: the attached tooth is not limited to one tooth. It is also possible to perform photography by attaching a member to a plurality of teeth, or to attach another tooth to the mouth without any other support, and manually photograph the part of the tooth.

將修正顯示部IG附加於齒表面之手段使用與標記ML相同之方法即可,例示使用顯示不因唾液等溶化或滲出者,於根據兩者共通地攝影左齒列一部分全景影像與右齒列一部分全景影像所得之修正用顯示部IG,修正兩影像畸變或大小,進行結合時較佳。The means for attaching the correction display unit IG to the surface of the tooth may be the same as the method of the mark ML. For example, if the display is not dissolved or exuded by saliva or the like, a part of the panoramic image and the right dentition of the left dentition are collectively photographed according to the two. It is preferable that the correction display portion IG obtained by a part of the panoramic image corrects the two image distortions or sizes and combines them.

再者,於結合分割為左齒列與中央齒列及右齒列3個之一部分全景影像時,亦可對各個一部分全景影像列之共通之齒設置輔助用顯示部IG。Further, when the panoramic image is divided into three parts of the left dentition, the central dentition, and the right dentition, the auxiliary display portion IG may be provided for the common teeth of each of the partial panoramic image sequences.

所攝影之各個靜態影像中之修正亦根據例如於連攝所獲得之影像內成為基準之輔助用顯示部IG,或亦可利用區塊匹配法或模板匹配法等檢測於所攝影之影像群中攝影有修正用顯示部IG者之一個並將其作為基準,檢測出其他影像中所攝影之輔助用顯示部IG後,與基準影像進行比較,檢測畸變、傾斜度、大小之差等,進行使用進行放大、縮小、旋轉、移動調整之仿射轉換之修正。於無法避免因手動引起之搖動之攝影時,藉由將輔助用顯示部IG附加於齒,可進行用於穩定之全景齒列影像形成之合成。The correction in each of the still images to be photographed is also detected in the image group to be photographed by, for example, a block matching method or a template matching method, based on, for example, the auxiliary display unit IG serving as a reference in the image obtained by continuous shooting. One of the correction display units IG is used as a reference, and the auxiliary display unit IG photographed in another image is detected, and compared with the reference image, the distortion, the inclination, the difference in size, and the like are detected and used. Correction of affine transformation for zooming in, zooming out, rotating, and moving adjustments. When the photographing by the manual shaking is unavoidable, the auxiliary display unit IG can be combined with the teeth to form a composite for the stable panoramic dentition image formation.

如上所述之使用修正用顯示部IG之影像之修正亦可使用例如Zhang之方法(IEEE.Transations on pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence,22(11);1330-1334,2000)等攝影機影像之校準中所使用之方法。The correction of the image using the correction display unit IG as described above can also be performed using a calibration of a camera image such as the method of Zhang (IEEE. Transations on Pattern Analysis and Machine Intelligence, 22 (11); 1330-1334, 2000). The method used.

又,亦有修正用顯示部IG係根據攝影狀態、仿射轉換等處理而不需要之情形。Further, there is a case where the correction display unit IG is not required depending on the imaging state, affine transformation, or the like.

圖8(b)係簡略地表示實際自臼齒進行連攝時之一次攝影範圍者。Fig. 8(b) is a simplified representation of one imaging range when the actual caries are continuously connected.

一面如906a→906b→906c→906d→906e→906f→906g般使口腔內攝影機之反射鏡部分隨時間移動,一面獲得利用靜態影像之連攝影像。On the other hand, the mirror portion of the intraoral camera is moved over time as 906a → 906b → 906c → 906d → 906e → 906f → 906g, and the continuous photographic image using the still image is obtained.

口腔內攝影機901係由於前端具備具有既定角度之反射鏡902之構成所構成,因此若自圖中之左臼齒攝影齒列面,則於中央附近,改變本體904之方向,且自圖中之右臼齒依序進行攝影,因此攝影圖8所示之906e至906g之面後,使口腔內攝影機901反轉,而開始自右臼齒起之攝影。The intraoral camera 901 is configured by a configuration in which the distal end includes a mirror 902 having a predetermined angle. Therefore, if the left molar is photographed from the left side of the figure, the direction of the body 904 is changed in the vicinity of the center, and right from the figure. Since the molars are photographed in sequence, the 902e to 906g faces shown in Fig. 8 are photographed, and the intraoral camera 901 is reversed to start photographing from the right molar.

連攝之速度係因手動地移動本體904,故較佳為考慮抖動等搖動之影響,設為每秒20張至30張左右而大量攝影,進行具有刪除抖動、對焦模糊之影像之余裕之連攝攝影。Since the speed of the continuous shooting is manually moved by the main body 904, it is preferable to consider the influence of shaking such as shaking, and it is set to be a large amount of photography from 20 to 30 sheets per second, and the margin of the image with the deletion jitter and the focus blur is connected. Photographing.

該連攝較佳為攝影至標記ML到達攝影畫面或反射鏡之中央為止,但亦有進行上述攝影至經過某程度之部位為止,然後,取捨選擇所攝影之影像之情形。The continuous shooting is preferably performed until the mark ML reaches the center of the photographing screen or the mirror. However, there is a case where the photographing is performed until a certain portion is passed, and then the photographed image is selected and selected.

有由於利用手動進行攝影機操作,故於合成之前,根據各影像之共通部位進行仿射轉換,調整影像之狀態更佳之情形。Since the camera operation is performed manually, it is preferable to adjust the state of the image by performing affine conversion based on the common portion of each image before synthesis.

例如,以成為合成之最初之中心之影像為基準對比較影像利用區塊匹配法檢測共通之複數之點。根據該共通之複數之點對下一影像進行仿射轉換。例如,選擇複數之與共通部分中之基準影像之像素座標(xa,ya)相對應之下一影像之像素座標(xb,yb),代入下式中獲得系數值a~f之值。For example, the comparison image is detected by the block matching method based on the image which is the center of the first synthesis, and the common plural is detected. The next image is affine transformed according to the point of the common plural. For example, the pixel coordinates (xb, yb) of a lower image corresponding to the pixel coordinates (xa, ya) of the reference image in the common portion are selected, and the values of the coefficient values a to f are obtained by substituting into the following equation.

亦可於將系數值代入下式之狀態下,對下一影像進行仿射轉換並整理影像之後,或一面調整影像,一面進行全景合成。It is also possible to perform the panoramic synthesis by performing affine transformation on the next image and sorting the image, or by adjusting the image while substituting the coefficient value into the following formula.

[數1][Number 1]

將如上所述自齒列900a之圖中左內側至正面附近為止,進行連攝而獲得之影像之一部分示於圖9,並用圖8說明根據該實施例之口腔內攝影機之攝影動作。One of the images obtained by continuous shooting from the left inner side to the front side of the figure of the tooth row 900a is shown in Fig. 9, and the photographing operation of the intraoral camera according to the embodiment will be described with reference to Fig. 8.

圖9(a)至(e)係進行圖8(b)所示之齒列之攝影影像資料中之中心附近907c至907e附近之連攝攝影時之攝影影像資料行之一例。Figs. 9(a) to 9(e) are diagrams showing an example of a photographic image data line at the time of continuous shooting in the vicinity of the center 907c to 907e in the photographic image data of the dentition shown in Fig. 8(b).

再者,口腔內攝影機係利用反射鏡902獲得齒列影像,因此攝影影像左右反轉,為了容易明白,以未反轉之狀態示於圖9及圖11中。Further, since the intra-oral camera obtains the dentition image by the mirror 902, the photographic image is reversed left and right, and is shown in FIGS. 9 and 11 in an unreversed state for easy understanding.

圖9(a)係攝影圖8(b)之906c附近所得之影像,圖9(b)係攝影906d附近所得之影像,圖9(c)係攝影906e附近所得之影像,圖9(d)係攝影906f附近所得之影像,而且,圖9(e)係攝影906g附近所得之影像。再者,由於手動地進行攝影,故多數情況下無法於攝影影像始終相同之狀態下進行攝影。因此,於影像變得傾斜之情形時等,較佳為於與其他齒之狀態例如重合之部分,進行利用仿射轉換進行調整之修正,圖9表示修正後之圖。Fig. 9(a) is an image obtained in the vicinity of 906c in Fig. 8(b), Fig. 9(b) is an image obtained in the vicinity of photograph 906d, and Fig. 9(c) is an image obtained in the vicinity of photograph 906e, Fig. 9(d) The image obtained near the image 906f is photographed, and the image obtained in the vicinity of 906g is photographed in Fig. 9(e). Further, since the photographing is performed manually, in many cases, photographing cannot be performed in the same state in which the photographed images are always the same. Therefore, when the image is tilted, it is preferable to perform correction by affine transformation in a portion overlapping with the state of the other teeth, and FIG. 9 shows a corrected view.

於修正時,作為一個成為基準之部位,除標記ML以外,亦可使用預先設定於攝影有反射鏡902之反射鏡面之垂直中央線CL、水平中央線HL。At the time of correction, as a reference portion, in addition to the mark ML, a vertical center line CL and a horizontal center line HL which are set in advance on the mirror surface of the mirror 902 may be used.

垂直中央線CL、水平中央線HL並非一定為顯示於影像者,又,亦可為分別對反射鏡之邊緣部中相當於垂直中央線、水平中央線之始點與終點之部位附加突起等標記之程度,亦有根據該標記虛擬地顯示之情形。The vertical center line CL and the horizontal center line HL are not necessarily displayed on the image, and may be provided with a mark such as a protrusion corresponding to a vertical center line and a start point and an end point of the horizontal center line in the edge portion of the mirror. The degree is also displayed in a virtual manner according to the mark.

又,亦可一併進行軟體修正因攝影用CCD攝影機之透鏡引起之畸變之處理。Further, it is also possible to perform a process of correcting the distortion caused by the lens of the CCD camera for photography.

RM係鏡之輪廓,實際所攝影之影像係於輪廓RM內成為圓形狀之影像,為了容易進行範圍說明,以四角形之影像顯示。The outline of the RM system mirror, the image actually photographed is a circular image in the outline RM, and is displayed as a quadrangular image for easy description of the range.

由於所攝影之影像為手持,故有齒與攝影機之間之距離不同之情形,於該情形時,亦可以標記ML與垂直中心線CL大致一致之影像為基準,修正其他攝影影像之大小。Since the image to be photographed is hand-held, the distance between the tooth and the camera is different. In this case, the image of the ML and the vertical center line CL may be marked as a reference to correct the size of the other captured image.

再者,有可藉由一面使反射鏡902之前端部輕微接觸齒面,一面進行連攝攝影,而使所獲得之影像穩定之情形。Further, there is a case where the obtained image is stabilized by causing the front end of the mirror 902 to slightly contact the tooth surface while performing the continuous shooting.

如圖8所示,自正面將本體904之反射鏡902配置於左側之臼齒,然後使其向正面方向移動而進行連攝,獲取例如圖9(a)~(e)之影像。As shown in Fig. 8, the mirror 902 of the main body 904 is disposed on the left side from the front side, and then moved in the front direction to perform continuous shooting, and images such as Figs. 9(a) to (e) are acquired.

於該情形時,以合成用影像之形式採用於標記ML與反射鏡902之垂直中心線(CL)一致之時序進行攝影而取得之影像直至圖9(c)為止。若使用圖9(d)及之後的圖式則合成時存在變成偏移之原因的情形,故較佳為不用於合成。In this case, the image obtained by photographing at the timing at which the mark ML coincides with the vertical center line (CL) of the mirror 902 is used in the form of a composite image until FIG. 9(c). If the pattern shown in Fig. 9(d) and the following figure is used, there is a case where the result of the shift occurs during the synthesis, and therefore it is preferably not used for the synthesis.

亦可以為了將影像10(c)作為基準之影像之標記ML為基準,視需要修正影像之傾斜等,即以標記ML之長邊及短邊為基準修正影像而作為基準影像。In order to use the image 10(c) as the reference image mark ML as a reference, it is also possible to correct the tilt of the image or the like as needed, that is, to correct the image based on the long side and the short side of the mark ML as a reference image.

以下對一合成操作例進行說明。A synthesis operation example will be described below.

將合成中所採用之影像示於圖9(f)以後。圖9(f)相當於圖9(c)所示之影像,圖9(g)相當於圖9(b),圖9(e)相當於圖9(a)。根據以影像906e為基準而影像906d之影像之形狀一致或近似之共通部分重疊圖9(f)所示之影像906e與圖9(g)所示之影像906d並進行合成。The image used in the synthesis is shown in Fig. 9(f). Fig. 9(f) corresponds to the image shown in Fig. 9(c), Fig. 9(g) corresponds to Fig. 9(b), and Fig. 9(e) corresponds to Fig. 9(a). The image 906e shown in FIG. 9(f) and the image 906d shown in FIG. 9(g) are superimposed on the common portion of the image in which the image 906d is aligned or approximated based on the image 906e.

於以圖9(f)為基準,進行重疊之情形時,以1001a表示圖9(g)之突出至左方面之部分。1001a成為臼齒方向之影像。In the case of overlapping with reference to Fig. 9(f), the portion of Fig. 9(g) that protrudes to the left is indicated by 1001a. 1001a becomes an image of the direction of the caries.

繼而,以圖9(g)之合成影像為基準,於形狀等共通之部分藉由目視或藉由影像處理方法,將圖9(g)所示之合成影像與圖9(a)所示之影像906c重疊。以1001b表示重疊之影像中自圖9(g)向左方向突出之部分。Then, based on the synthesized image of FIG. 9(g), the composite image shown in FIG. 9(g) and the composite image shown in FIG. 9(a) are visually or by image processing methods in common portions such as shapes. The image 906c overlaps. The portion of the superimposed image that protrudes to the left from FIG. 9(g) is indicated by 1001b.

1001b成為臼齒方向之影像。1001b becomes an image of the direction of the caries.

繼而,於鄰接之影像間進行該動作,進而,與下一鄰接之影像於共通部分進行重疊,藉此自標記位於既定位置之影像向臼齒方向全景影像地進行合成而形成左側齒列。Then, the operation is performed between the adjacent images, and the next adjacent image is superimposed on the common portion, thereby synthesizing the image from the predetermined position to the panoramic image in the molar direction to form the left side tooth row.

除此以外,可例示接合圖9(f)所示之突出至中心影像之部分1001a、1001b‧‧‧‧而形成左半部分之全景影像之方法。In addition, a method of forming a panoramic image of the left half by projecting the portions 1001a, 1001b, and ‧ ‧ which are projected to the center image as shown in Fig. 9 (f) can be exemplified.

又,突出之部分之檢測亦可抽取例如於圖9(c)之900e與圖9(b)之900d之間突出之部分,進而,抽取於圖9(b)之900d與圖9(a)之900c之間突出之部分,進而,集中於下一鄰接之影像間突出之部分,最後將基準影像圖設為10(f),接合上述突出之部分,而形成全景影像。亦有所突出之部分之影像較佳為以靠近中央之影像為基準,自其上方使鄰接之影像重疊之情形。Further, the detection of the protruding portion may also extract a portion protruding between, for example, 900e of FIG. 9(c) and 900d of FIG. 9(b), and further, extracted from 900d of FIG. 9(b) and FIG. 9(a). The portion protruding between the 900c is further concentrated on the portion protruding between the next adjacent images, and finally the reference image is set to 10 (f), and the protruding portion is joined to form a panoramic image. The image which is also prominent is preferably a case where adjacent images are superimposed from the top based on the image near the center.

再者,即便於未完全重疊而一致或近似之情形時,於標記部分共通地存在之情形時,亦可重疊上述部分且進行相同之合成。再者,由於為手動,故有針對所獲得之靜態影像而遠近感或傾斜度不同之情形。於該情形時,較佳為使仿射轉換等自動地修正,或任意地放大縮小而進行調整。Furthermore, even in the case where they are not completely overlapped and coincident or approximate, when the mark portions are commonly present, the above portions may be overlapped and the same composition may be performed. Furthermore, since it is manual, there is a case where the distance or the inclination is different for the obtained still image. In this case, it is preferable to automatically correct the affine conversion or the like, or to perform the adjustment by arbitrarily zooming in and out.

將合成後之狀態示於圖12(a)中。如圖12(a)所示,可形成左半部分之全景齒列影像。The state after the synthesis is shown in Fig. 12 (a). As shown in Fig. 12(a), a panoramic dentition image of the left half can be formed.

繼而,如圖10(a)所示,在於上下嚙合之狀態下之齒列900a之右內側配置有本體103d之反射鏡104之狀態下,儘量與齒列900a表面保持固定之距離,並且於以1101a→1101b→1101c之順序向中央接近之方向上進行利用靜態影像之連攝攝影。Then, as shown in FIG. 10(a), in a state in which the mirror 104 of the main body 103d is disposed on the right inner side of the tooth row 900a in the state of being vertically meshed, the distance from the surface of the tooth row 900a is kept as constant as possible, and The sequence of 1101a→1101b→1101c is performed in the direction in which the center is approaching, and continuous shooting using still images is performed.

簡略地表示攝影於圖10(b)中之靜態影像與齒列900a之位置關係。The positional relationship between the still image and the tooth row 900a photographed in Fig. 10(b) is schematically shown.

使用者一面手持口腔內攝影機901,一面使其向1102a→1102b→1102c→1102d→1102e→1102f之方向移動而進行攝影,連攝地取得靜態影像。由於本實施例為手持型,故攝影影像於左右、縱深方向上傾斜或偏移,但亦可設置利用仿射轉換,根據進行連攝而獲得之存在於鄰接之影像間之共通部分進行旋轉、移動而進行影像之調整之步驟。When the user holds the intra-oral camera 901, it moves in the direction of 1102a→1102b→1102c→1102d→1102e→1102f, and captures a still image. Since the present embodiment is a hand-held type, the photographic image is tilted or shifted in the left and right direction and the depth direction. However, it is also possible to use an affine transformation to rotate the common portion existing between the adjacent images obtained by performing the continuous shooting. The step of moving the image to adjust.

圖10(a)所示之口腔內攝影機901直接使用圖8中之者,因此附加相同之編號並省略說明。The intraoral camera 901 shown in Fig. 10(a) is directly used in Fig. 8, and therefore, the same reference numerals will be given and the description will be omitted.

圖11(a)至(e)表示圖10(b)之1102a至1102f之範圍內代表性之影像。Figures 11(a) to (e) show representative images within the range of 1102a to 1102f of Figure 10(b).

對於圖11與圖9之間共通之構成,附加與圖9所示之符號相同之符號。For the common configuration between FIG. 11 and FIG. 9, the same reference numerals as those shown in FIG. 9 are attached.

於圖11中,圖11(a)表示圖10(b)之1102d之影像附近,圖11(b)表示圖10(b)之1102e之影像附近,圖11(c)表示圖10(b)之1102f之影像附近。In Fig. 11, Fig. 11(a) shows the vicinity of the image of 1102d of Fig. 10(b), Fig. 11(b) shows the vicinity of the image of 1102e of Fig. 10(b), and Fig. 11(c) shows Fig. 10(b). Near the image of 1102f.

圖11(d)表示圖10(b)之1102g之影像附近,圖11(e)表示圖10(b)之1102h之影像附近。Fig. 11(d) shows the vicinity of the image of 1102g of Fig. 10(b), and Fig. 11(e) shows the vicinity of the image of 1102h of Fig. 10(b).

再者,圖11(d)及(e)係垂直中心線CL與標記ML一致後,進而使反射鏡104向左方向移動時之相片影像,若採用該等影像,則自左右方向所攝影之影像之重疊之部分變多而產生影像之偏移,因此未採用上述影像,而採用圖11(a)至(c)。Further, in FIGS. 11(d) and 11(e), the vertical center line CL is aligned with the mark ML, and then the photographic image when the mirror 104 is moved to the left direction is photographed from the left and right directions. The overlap of the images is increased and the image is shifted. Therefore, the above images are not used, and Figs. 11(a) to (c) are used.

其中,將以標記ML與垂直中心線CL一致之影像(圖11(c)之1102f)為基準者示於圖11(f)。繼而,重疊圖11(b)所示之影像1102e與1102f之共通之部位。Here, the image (1102f of FIG. 11(c)) in which the mark ML coincides with the vertical center line CL is shown in FIG. 11(f). Then, the portion common to the images 1102e and 1102f shown in Fig. 11(b) is superimposed.

於以影像1102f為基準自其上方於形狀一致或近似之範圍重疊影像1102e之狀態下突出的部分為1201a。The portion that protrudes from the state in which the image 1102e is superimposed or approximated in the shape of the image 1102f is 1201a.

繼而,以重疊之影像為基準使用圖案匹配法等自其上方於形狀一致或大致一致之部位使該重疊之影像與圖11(b)所示之影像1201b重疊。Then, the superimposed image is superimposed on the image 1201b shown in FIG. 11(b) from the upper portion of the image having the same or substantially the same shape by using the pattern matching method or the like as a reference.

於重疊之狀態下突出之部分為1201b。使以上述方式鄰接之影像重疊且相向而形成右側之齒列。作為其他合成方法,亦存在可如圖12(b)所示合成基準影像906e與影像1201a及1201b之情形。The portion protruding in the overlapping state is 1201b. The images adjacent to each other in the above manner are superposed and opposed to each other to form a tooth row on the right side. As another synthesis method, there are cases where the reference image 906e and the images 1201a and 1201b can be synthesized as shown in Fig. 12(b).

再者,亦有於重疊前後之影像時,略有偏移之情形時,亦可刪除重疊之部位之任一者之情形。Furthermore, when there is a slight offset in the image before and after the overlap, it is also possible to delete either of the overlapping portions.

按照以上之順序,合成連攝靜態影像,重疊合成左齒列之影像時之中心影像906e與合成右齒列之影像時之中心影像1101c,並使其一致、大致一致,藉此形成圖12(c)所示之全景齒列303。According to the above sequence, the continuous image is synthesized, and the central image 906e when the image of the left dentition is superimposed and the central image 1101c when the image of the right dentition is synthesized is uniformly and substantially identical, thereby forming FIG. 12 ( c) The illustrated panoramic tooth row 303.

重疊較佳為例如根據中央之齒與齒之邊界部分(KL),連接合成左右之全景齒列。再者,亦有如下之情形:齒與齒之邊界係為了與上顎、下顎不同之情形相對應,亦可將上顎或下顎之牙齒之邊界部分用作邊界,而進行合成,此時之合成亦可分別合成僅上顎之全景齒列與下顎之全景齒列,最後合成上顎與下顎。The overlap is preferably performed by, for example, combining the left and right panoramic tooth rows according to the boundary portion (KL) between the teeth and the teeth of the center. Furthermore, there are cases where the boundary between the tooth and the tooth corresponds to the case of the upper jaw or the lower jaw, and the boundary portion of the upper or lower jaw tooth can also be used as a boundary for synthesis, and the synthesis at this time is also The panoramic dentition of the top dentition and the lower jaw of the upper jaw can be separately synthesized, and finally the upper and lower jaws are combined.

此時,於在中心影像間略有偏移之情形時,亦可刪去重合之範圍中之任一影像。At this time, any image in the overlapping range may be deleted when there is a slight offset between the center images.

又,亦有預先中心影像906e與中心影像1101c並非必需重疊,採用任一中心影像1301即可之情形。Further, there is a case where the pre-center image 906e and the center image 1101c do not have to overlap, and any of the center images 1301 can be used.

於上述之情形時,於採用例如中心影像906e之情形時,有時亦略微修正1201a、1201b之大小等,於採用中心影像1101c之情形時,有時亦修正1004a、1004b之大小。除如上所述,接合各影像間之突出之部分之方法以外,亦有如下之情形:於未抽取突出之部分,而直接於共通部分進行重疊之情形時,一面調整大小一面重疊中心影像彼此。In the case of the above, when the center image 906e is used, for example, the size of 1201a and 1201b may be slightly corrected. When the center image 1101c is used, the sizes of 1004a and 1004b may be corrected. In addition to the method of joining the protruding portions between the images as described above, there is also a case where the central image is superimposed while being overlapped while the overlapping portion is not extracted.

如上所述,自中心影像,合成左右之齒列,設為左側合成齒列與右側合成齒列,根據各自之中心影像合成該等,藉此可形成抑制偏移之全景齒列。As described above, from the center image, the left and right dentitions are combined, and the left synthetic dentition and the right synthetic dentition are combined, and these are synthesized based on the respective central images, whereby a panoramic dentition that suppresses the offset can be formed.

根據中心影像之合成較佳為例如將中心之齒與齒之接觸線(邊緣)作為特徵部位而合成左側合成齒列與右側合成齒列。再者,標記並非必需附加於中心之齒,亦有為於攝影時,於改變攝影機之方向之時序所攝影之牙齒之部位等之情形,為了其他目的等而標記之位置可適當選擇。Preferably, for example, the combination of the center image and the contact line (edge) of the tooth and the tooth is used as a feature portion to synthesize the left synthetic tooth row and the right synthetic tooth row. Further, the mark is not necessarily attached to the tooth of the center, and may be a position of the tooth photographed at the timing of changing the direction of the camera at the time of photographing, and the position of the mark may be appropriately selected for other purposes or the like.

特徵部位亦與標記相同,若為於影像合成時可進行位置對準之部位,則並無特別限定。The feature portion is also the same as the mark, and is a portion that can be aligned when the image is synthesized, and is not particularly limited.

又,預先對作為被攝體之齒列附加標記,或自影像設定相當於標記之部位,藉此可進行更準確之合成。Further, by adding a mark to the tooth row as the subject in advance or setting a portion corresponding to the mark from the image, more accurate synthesis can be performed.

再者,以上之動作說明係於使用繪圖軟體,根據對顯示於電腦螢幕上之複數之影像進行目視與利用滑鼠操作之拷貝黏貼、拖放、影像之縮小放大、傾斜修正等操作而進行之情形時,有時亦可利用公知之自動全景相片合成用軟體(Photoshop Elements 7(商標)(Adobe公司製造)、Photo Stitch(商標)(Canon公司製造)等。Furthermore, the above description of the action is performed by using the drawing software, according to the visual display of the plurality of images displayed on the computer screen, and the copying, dragging and dropping, zooming and zooming, tilt correction, etc. of the mouse operation. In the case of the case, a known automatic panoramic photo composition software (Photoshop Elements 7 (trademark) (manufactured by Adobe), Photo Stitch (trademark) (manufactured by Canon), or the like may be used.

三維全景齒列影像之製成3D panoramic dentition image

齒列係相對於咬合平面呈弓狀彎曲之形狀,於實際掌握其整體之情形時,於二維之全景顯示中,知道各個齒之情況,但由於在齒呈平面狀排列之狀態下進行顯示,故三維之掌握不充分,因此可三維地顯示之方法較佳。The dentition is curved in an arc shape with respect to the occlusal plane. When the overall situation is grasped, in the two-dimensional panoramic display, the condition of each tooth is known, but the display is performed in a state in which the teeth are arranged in a plane. Therefore, the grasp of three-dimensional is not sufficient, so that the method of displaying in three dimensions is preferable.

利用口腔內之實體影像獲得全景影像之方法係於例如日本國際公開2007/063980號公報中記載有如下情況:藉由形成具有近似於齒列基本形狀相似虛擬曲線之形狀之框架並於其側面配置有攝像裝置者,攝影齒列整體,將其設為立體形式,藉此獲得立體三維之全景影像。A method of obtaining a panoramic image using a physical image in the oral cavity is described in, for example, Japanese Laid-Open Patent Publication No. 2007/063980, in which a frame having a shape similar to a virtual curve having a basic shape similar to a dentition is formed and disposed on the side thereof. In the case of an image pickup device, the entire dentition is formed in a three-dimensional form, thereby obtaining a stereoscopic three-dimensional panoramic image.

確實可以立體狀攝影齒列之影像,但有在必需形成具備基本形狀相似虛擬曲線之框架之方面難以說是簡易之測定方法之方面。It is true that the image of the dentition can be photographed in a stereoscopic manner, but there is an aspect in which it is difficult to say that it is a simple measurement method in order to form a frame having a virtual curve having a substantially similar shape.

繼而,將形成實體影像之三維全景影像之實施例示於圖13並進行說明。Next, an embodiment in which a three-dimensional panoramic image of a solid image is formed will be described with reference to FIG.

圖13係用以說明三維全景齒列影像形成手段之方塊圖。Figure 13 is a block diagram for explaining a three-dimensional panoramic dentition image forming means.

1401係攝影資料輸入手段,為連接如圖14所示之具備複數之攝影機之立體影像攝影用之攝影機,同時形成與攝影機之個數相同之張數之影像之手段。The 1401 series photographic data input means is a means for connecting a camera for stereoscopic image photography having a plurality of cameras as shown in FIG. 14 and simultaneously forming an image of the same number as the number of cameras.

攝影資料輸入手段1401亦有具備針對每一張按下快門之樣式、及可進行藉由按一次快門而攝影複數之相片之連攝攝影之構成,連續地輸出複數對靜態影像之情形。The photographic data input means 1401 also has a configuration in which a shutter image is pressed for each one and a photographic shooting in which a plurality of photographs are taken by one shutter, and a plurality of pairs of still images are continuously output.

1402係校正手段,為用以進行因透鏡形狀引起之畸變、抖動等之修正、遠近距離之修正等之手段,為稱作所謂之校準手段之使用公知之方法而構成者。The 1402 type correction means is a means for performing correction such as distortion, jitter, and the like due to the shape of the lens, correction of the distance and the like, and is a method known as a so-called calibration means.

校正手段1402係對同時攝影之影像之各者實施校正者,有時亦刪除畸變較大之周邊部。The correcting means 1402 corrects each of the simultaneously photographed images, and sometimes removes the peripheral portion having a large distortion.

1403係共通點檢測手段,為用以檢測例如一對影像之共通點之手段。共通點檢測手段1403係將一方之影像之一像素或一調和色之像素之亮度值作為基準用亮度值,使用其他影像之一像素或一調和色之像素之亮度值,獲得例如亮度差之總和(SAD)、亮度差之平方和(SSD)值並將根據其最小值或最大值而一致之部分或藉由子像素推斷而推斷之部分作為共通點而輸出者。The 1403 is a common point detecting means, which is a means for detecting, for example, a common point of a pair of images. The common point detecting means 1403 obtains, for example, the sum of the luminance differences by using the luminance value of one of the pixels of one image or the pixel of a harmonic color as the reference luminance value, and using the luminance value of one of the other pixels or a pixel of the harmonic color. (SAD), the sum of squares of luminance differences (SSD) values and outputs a portion that is identical according to its minimum or maximum value or a portion inferred by sub-pixel estimation as a common point.

更具體而言,亦可利用例如新井元基及其他人編著,影像之區塊匹配中之相關函數與子像素指定方式之最佳化,社團法人資訊處理學會研究報告,2004,P33-40中所表示之構成或其他公知方法。More specifically, it is also possible to use, for example, a new well Yuanji and others to edit, the correlation function in the block matching of images and the sub-pixel designation method, the research report of the Society for Information Processing Society, 2004, P33-40 The composition shown or other known methods.

1404係世界座標轉換手段,為將所獲得之共通點之各影像之座標整體上轉換成共通之三維座標之手段。The 1404 is a world coordinate conversion means for converting the coordinates of the respective images of the obtained common points into a common three-dimensional coordinate.

世界座標轉換手段1404係藉由例如三角法、8點演算法、三角測量法等算術方法進行電腦處理,利用由上述共通點檢測手段1403獲得之共通點之各個相片影像之座標值根據視差值或攝影機之特性(作為內部參數之透鏡之焦點距離、影像中心、像素尺寸、及作為外部參數之2個攝影機之位置及姿勢),形成輸出世界座標(X,Y,Z)者。The world coordinate conversion means 1404 performs computer processing by an arithmetic method such as a trigonometry method, an 8-point algorithm, or a triangulation method, and uses the coordinate value of each photo image of the common point obtained by the common point detecting means 1403 according to the parallax value. Or the characteristics of the camera (the focus distance of the lens as the internal parameter, the image center, the pixel size, and the position and posture of the two cameras as external parameters), and the output world coordinates (X, Y, Z) are formed.

例如,利用由各不相同之攝影機之內部參數及外部參數所構成之透視投影矩陣P1、P2、分別攝影所得之影像之共通點M之地方座標(u1,v1)及(u2,v2)根據通常所知之式(1),求得世界座標(X,Y,Z)。For example, the local coordinates (u1, v1) and (u2, v2) of the common point M of the respective images obtained by the perspective projection matrices P1 and P2 composed of the internal parameters and the external parameters of the different cameras are generally used. Known formula (1), the world coordinates (X, Y, Z) are obtained.

[數2][Number 2]

關於使用攝影機之內部參數、外部參數求出透視投影矩陣,或利用自各靜態影像所獲得之複數之共通點之地方座標等求出透視投影矩陣P1、P2及ω1、ω2,並根據式(1)獲得世界座標之方法等,較佳地使用例如電子資訊通訊學會雜誌Vol.92,No.6,2009,463-468中記載之方法等公知方法。The perspective projection matrix is obtained by using the internal parameters of the camera and the external parameters, or the perspective projection matrices P 1 , P 2 and ω1, ω2 are obtained by using the local coordinates of the complex points obtained from the respective static images, and according to the formula ( 1) A method of obtaining a world coordinate or the like, and a known method such as the method described in Journal of Electronic Information and Communication Society, Vol. 92, No. 6, 2009, 463-468 is preferably used.

作為其他之獲得三維座標之方法,與特寫方法一併記載於例如、牙科材料.器械Vol.19No.3333-338(2000)等,但並不限定於此,可採用其他一般之方法。Other methods for obtaining three-dimensional coordinates are described in, for example, dental materials, instruments, Vol. 19 No. 3333-338 (2000), and the like, but are not limited thereto, and other general methods can be employed.

1405係三維影像形成手段,亦可將該世界座標資料顯示於例如虛擬地形成於電腦上之三維座標空間,形成以直線或曲線連結該座標資料而顯示之線框模型,進而,藉由將虛擬面資料貼附於由線包圍之部分,獲得更真實之全景三維資料。1405 is a three-dimensional image forming means, and the world coordinate data may be displayed on, for example, a three-dimensional coordinate space virtually formed on a computer, and a wireframe model in which the coordinate data is connected by a straight line or a curved line is formed, and further, by The surface information is attached to the part surrounded by the line to obtain more realistic panoramic 3D data.

亦可藉由於立體座標上將三維全景狀之齒列資料立體化,使得顯示彎曲狀之齒列。It is also possible to display a curved dentition by stereoscopically arranging the three-dimensional panoramic dentition data on the three-dimensional coordinates.

1406係顯示手段,由電腦用之螢幕、印表機等形成,亦可作為虛擬三維影像而顯示於普通之電腦螢幕上,進而,亦可二維地投影彎曲之全景狀齒列影像等而進行顯示。The 1406 display means is formed by a screen for a computer, a printer, or the like, and can be displayed as a virtual three-dimensional image on a general computer screen, and can also project a curved panoramic dentition image or the like two-dimensionally. display.

圖14表示於前端具備2個攝影機之探針狀之三維計測用之探針1500之一例。Fig. 14 shows an example of a probe 1500 for three-dimensional measurement in which probes of two cameras are provided at the tip end.

1501係攝像部A,於中心配置透鏡1501a,具有所謂之攝影機模組形態。The 1501 imaging unit A has a lens 1501a disposed at the center, and has a so-called camera module form.

1502係攝像部B,於中心配置透鏡1501b,具有所謂之攝影機模組形態。The 1502 imaging unit B has a lens 1501b disposed at the center, and has a so-called camera module form.

1503係照明光照射部,較佳為設置於攝像部A1501、攝像部B1502之周圍,為經由光導路徑1504將形成於支承構件1506內部之發光手段1505所發出之光照射於作為被攝體之牙齒之表面之部分。照明光照射部1503較佳為進行更均一之照明般之形狀,並不既定於圖14所示之形狀。The 1503 illumination light irradiation unit is preferably provided around the imaging unit A1501 and the imaging unit B1502, and irradiates the light emitted by the light-emitting means 1505 formed inside the support member 1506 through the light guide path 1504 to the teeth as the subject. Part of the surface. The illumination light irradiation unit 1503 is preferably in a shape that is more uniform in illumination, and is not necessarily in the shape shown in FIG.

1503a係指示用光源,為用以表示攝影面者,且為進行聚光燈之輸出之部分,使用以黑圓筒體覆蓋周邊之紅色、藍色、白色等LED。由於為聚光燈之光,故根據距離,照射面之面積不同,因此可一面保持於固定一面使探針1500移動。The 1503a is a light source for indicating, and is a portion for indicating the image of the image, and for the portion where the output of the spotlight is used, an LED such as red, blue, or white that covers the periphery with a black cylinder is used. Since it is the light of the spotlight, the area of the irradiation surface differs depending on the distance, so that the probe 1500 can be moved while being fixed.

1504係光導路徑,形成於支承構件1506內部,表面較佳為由鋁、銀等薄膜等光反射構件被覆。The 1504 light guide path is formed inside the support member 1506, and the surface is preferably covered with a light reflection member such as a film such as aluminum or silver.

1505係發光手段,裝著於支承構件1506內,例示白色LED、其他光源。於本實施例中,亦可進行閃光儀般之斷續之快閃驅動或連續之照明驅動等。The 1505-type light-emitting means is housed in the support member 1506, and exemplifies a white LED and another light source. In this embodiment, a flash-like intermittent flash drive or a continuous illumination drive or the like can be performed.

1506係支承構件,利用例如輕量且硬質之塑膠材料而成形,於前端配置攝像部等,具有棒狀且容易插入至口腔內之深處為止之形狀。The 1506-type support member is formed by, for example, a lightweight and rigid plastic material, and is provided with an image pickup unit or the like at the distal end, and has a shape of a rod and is easily inserted into a deep portion of the oral cavity.

1507係操作用開關,為進行快門操作等者。可為其數量根據操作規格或目的進行設定即可之任意之構成。The 1507 series operation switch is used for shutter operation. Any number of components can be set according to the operation specifications or purposes.

於使用快門之情形時,亦可採用於按壓期間以既定間隔連續地進行快門驅動般之規格。In the case of using a shutter, it is also possible to adopt a specification in which the shutter drive is continuously performed at a predetermined interval during pressing.

1508係握持部,與支承構件1506一體地構成,較佳為利用輕量且堅固之塑膠材料等而成形。The 1508-type grip portion is integrally formed with the support member 1506, and is preferably formed of a lightweight and strong plastic material or the like.

1509係用以與外部電源連接,且進行與外部資料處理裝置等之連接之電導線,亦可利用利用USB接合連接器之纜線。The 1509 is an electric wire that is connected to an external power source and is connected to an external data processing device or the like, and may be a cable that uses a USB connector.

又,光源為閃光儀之發光,亦有於可將連攝資料暫時儲存於攝影機內部之情形或使用Zigbee(註冊商標)、無線通訊用之前端電路進行無線連接之情形時等不需要之情形。Further, the light source is a light-emitting device, and may be used when the connected data is temporarily stored in the inside of the camera or when Zigbee (registered trademark) or the wireless communication communication terminal is used for wireless connection.

對圖13及圖14所示之本實施例之動作進行說明。The operation of this embodiment shown in Figs. 13 and 14 will be described.

於圖13之攝影資料輸入手段1401中使用者手持圖14所示之握持部1508,於如圖8所示上下之齒嚙合之狀態下使支承構件1506之前端之攝像部A1501與攝像部B1502靠近被攝體部位,一面觀察指示用光源1503a所指示之聚光燈之大小、位置,一面按下操作用開關1507而開始連攝動作。In the photographic data input means 1401 of FIG. 13, the user holds the grip portion 1508 shown in FIG. 14 and causes the imaging portion A1501 and the imaging portion B1502 at the front end of the support member 1506 in a state where the upper and lower teeth are engaged as shown in FIG. When the size and position of the spotlight indicated by the light source 1503a are observed close to the subject, the operation switch 1507 is pressed to start the continuous shooting operation.

亦存在可不進行連攝動作,而於每次攝影時按下快門用之操作用開關1507之情形,但為了防止抖動等較佳為減少按壓動作之連攝。There is also a case where the operation switch 1507 for pressing the shutter is pressed every time the continuous shooting operation is performed, but it is preferable to reduce the continuous shooting of the pressing operation in order to prevent the shaking.

於該按下之狀態下,攝影至與圖8(a)相同之位置為止,繼而,於與圖10(a)相同之狀態下,攝影至相同之位置為止。In the pressed state, the image is taken to the same position as that of Fig. 8(a), and then, in the same state as in Fig. 10(a), the same position is captured.

於圖15中表示利用一次連攝攝影所獲得之影像群中成對之影像。再者,於在口腔內,更高精度地計測齒之表面形狀之情形時,接近之狀態下之攝影較佳,攝影機之焦點距離亦較佳為於可進行特寫之狀態下設定。A pair of images in a group of images obtained by one-shot photography is shown in FIG. Further, in the case where the surface shape of the tooth is measured with higher precision in the oral cavity, the photographing in the approaching state is preferable, and the focal length of the camera is preferably set in a state in which the close-up can be performed.

該等所攝影之影像係利用圖13之校正手段1402校正(校準)因透鏡之曲面而產生之畸變或傾斜等而向共通點檢測手段1403輸出。The images to be photographed are output to the common point detecting means 1403 by correcting (calibrating) the distortion or the inclination due to the curved surface of the lens by the correcting means 1402 of FIG.

進行三維處理時,考慮如圖9、圖11所示自中心附近向左右方向進行合成之情況較佳為自中心進行,但並不特別限定於該方法。When three-dimensional processing is performed, it is preferable to perform the synthesis from the vicinity of the center in the left-right direction as shown in FIGS. 9 and 11 from the center, but the method is not particularly limited.

圖15(a)係齒之正面,為攝製靠近中心之場所所得之影像,亦為利用將圖14之探針1500作為構成要件之攝影資料輸入手段1401進行攝影而獲得之資料。Fig. 15 (a) shows the image of the front side of the tooth, which is obtained by photographing the photographic material input means 1401 which is the constituting element of the probe 1500 of Fig. 14 .

1701a係攝像部B1502之影像,1701b係攝像部A1501之影像。對該影像分別賦予將中心點設為相同部分之座標,例如設定攝像部B1502所攝影之圖15(a)之影像1701a之任意點A(x1,y1)並尋找表示與其相同位置之點A'(x2,y2)。將點A作為例如一個像素之區塊,求出平均亮度值。自設想為圖15(a)之影像資料1702a之點A'之位置之附近,求出與點A相同尺寸之像素區塊而獲得兩者之亮度值之差之總和或平方和,一面進行相同之運算一面逐漸向點A'方向移動。形成一致度評價曲線。The 1701a is an image of the imaging unit B1502, and the 1701b is an image of the imaging unit A1501. Each of the images is given a coordinate having the center point as the same portion. For example, an arbitrary point A (x1, y1) of the image 1701a of FIG. 15(a) photographed by the imaging unit B1502 is set, and a point A' indicating the same position is found. (x2, y2). The point A is used as, for example, a block of one pixel, and an average luminance value is obtained. In the vicinity of the position of the point A' of the image data 1702a of FIG. 15(a), the pixel block of the same size as the point A is obtained, and the sum or square of the difference between the luminance values of the two is obtained, and the same is performed. The calculation gradually moves toward the point A'. A consistency evaluation curve is formed.

於一致度評價曲線上,將該差分值之總和或差之平方和變為最小之部分或變為最大之部分設定為點A'之子像素推斷方法較佳,但若為獲得共通點之方法則並不特別既定於此。On the coincidence evaluation curve, the sub-pixel estimation method in which the sum of squares of the difference values or the square of the difference is minimized or the portion that becomes the largest is set to the point A' is preferable, but if the method of obtaining the common point is It is not specifically defined here.

繼而,對1701a之點A之相鄰之像素區塊進行相同之操作,自影像1702a上檢測共通之點。重複進行該操作。於去除影像1701a與1701b之包藏之範圍之共通範圍1703a中求出共通點之座標。Then, the same operation is performed on the adjacent pixel blocks of point A of 1701a, and the common point is detected from the image 1702a. Repeat this operation. The coordinates of the common point are obtained in the common range 1703a in which the range of the images 1701a and 1701b is removed.

於該情形時,以新附加之標記ML之位置為中心形成共通點座標,亦可獲得精度較高之共通點。In this case, the common point coordinates are formed centering on the position of the newly added mark ML, and a common point with higher precision can also be obtained.

又,若縮小該區塊則可於精度更高之狀態下檢測共通點,但處理時間變長,因此區塊之大小等可適當選擇。Further, if the block is reduced, the common point can be detected in a state where the accuracy is higher, but the processing time becomes longer, and therefore the size of the block or the like can be appropriately selected.

繼而,於圖13之世界座標轉換手段1404中,自例如對該共通點採取複數點進行計測所得之座標值,根據視差、焦點距離等攝影器固有之參數及1式轉換成三維世界座標系。該具體之方法係較佳地採用上述文獻等中所表示之普通之方法。Then, in the world coordinate conversion means 1404 of FIG. 13, the coordinate value obtained by taking the complex point from the common point, for example, is converted into a three-dimensional world coordinate system based on the parameters unique to the camera such as the parallax and the focal length. The specific method is preferably a conventional method represented by the above documents and the like.

利用圖15(a)之一對影像求出共通點後,使用下一圖15(b)所示之影像對1701b、1702b將去除包藏之範圍之共通範圍1703b轉換成三維之世界座標。於成為三維世界座標之狀態下製成成形為例如圖15(d)所示之線框狀者。After the common point is obtained for the image using one of FIG. 15(a), the common range 1703b for removing the occlusion range is converted into a three-dimensional world coordinate using the image pair 1701b, 1702b shown in FIG. 15(b). In the state of being a three-dimensional world coordinate, it is formed into, for example, a wire frame shape as shown in Fig. 15 (d).

進而,求出圖15(c)所示之影像對1701c、1702c之去除包藏範圍之共通範圍1703c之各共通點之三維世界座標。Further, the three-dimensional world coordinates of the common points of the common range 1703c of the removal eigenranges of the image pairs 1701c and 1702c shown in FIG. 15(c) are obtained.

繼而,於圖13所示之三維影像形成手段1405中,使轉換為世界座標之根據圖15(a)而求得之三維座標與圖15(b)並非平面之重疊而是於虛擬三維座標空間重疊。Then, in the three-dimensional image forming means 1405 shown in FIG. 13, the three-dimensional coordinates obtained according to FIG. 15(a) converted to the world coordinates are not overlapped with the plane in FIG. 15(b) but in the virtual three-dimensional coordinate space. overlapping.

進而,將圖15(c)所示之三維世界座標重疊於該重疊之影像。Further, the three-dimensional world coordinates shown in FIG. 15(c) are superimposed on the superimposed images.

該重疊若為虛擬之三維空間內之重疊,則可以根據該等經三維世界座標化之資料分別將例如如圖15(d)所示之線框狀之齒列虛擬地顯示於電腦螢幕上,進行目視且操作滑鼠等電腦介面而將各者重疊之方式進行,於提高重疊之精度之情形時,亦有以進行比較之三維數值之任一個為基準,藉由差分比較等而差分成為最小之狀態般之合成較佳之情形。亦可以利用區塊匹配之子像素推斷方法獲得共通點。If the overlap is an overlap in the virtual three-dimensional space, the wire frame-shaped dentition shown in FIG. 15(d) can be virtually displayed on the computer screen according to the three-dimensional world-stabilized data. Performing a visual operation and operating a computer interface such as a mouse to overlap each other. When the accuracy of the overlap is improved, the difference is minimized by differential comparison or the like based on any of the compared three-dimensional values. The state of synthesis is better. A common point can also be obtained by using a block matching sub-pixel inference method.

圖15(a)至(c)係朝向正面而形成根據右側之齒列之經三維世界座標化之資料之齒列,繼而,進行左側之齒列之三維世界座標化。15(a) to (c) form a tooth row based on the three-dimensional world-coordinated data of the right tooth row toward the front surface, and then the three-dimensional world coordinate of the left tooth row is performed.

世界座標化係使用上述公知之方法即可,亦可為例如取得根據2個影像之三維座標後,進行向作為共通之座標之世界座標之轉換者。The world coordinate system may be a method known as the above-described method, and may be a converter that converts the three-dimensional coordinates of the two images to the world coordinates that are common coordinates.

亦有取得左右之齒列之三維世界座標後,藉由電腦之三維虛擬顯示、或利用座標值之數值之重疊之近似之一致進行結合即可之情形。It is also possible to combine the three-dimensional world coordinates of the left and right dentitions by means of a three-dimensional virtual display of the computer or by using a uniform approximation of the values of the coordinate values.

於該情形時,較佳為以標記部分之三維座標資料為基準進行重疊,根據該方法,不僅二維即便三維座標,亦可藉由圖13所示之顯示手段1406進行無偏移之全景齒列顯示。In this case, it is preferable to overlap based on the three-dimensional coordinate data of the mark portion. According to the method, not only the two-dimensional even three-dimensional coordinates, but also the display means 1406 shown in FIG. 13 can be used to perform the offset-free panoramic tooth. The column is displayed.

重疊係相同形狀部分之資料數值中之重疊,於不一致之情形時,例示利用採取兩者之座標值之平均值而進行重疊之方法、於畫面上拖放影像之手動方法,一面操作電腦滑鼠一面進行重疊後,求出座標值之方法等。The overlap is the overlap of the data values of the same shape portion. In the case of inconsistency, the method of using the method of overlapping the average values of the coordinates of the two and the manual method of dragging and dropping the image on the screen is performed, while operating the computer mouse A method of obtaining a coordinate value after overlapping one side.

再者,亦有如下之情形:於即便為具有相互共通之部位之影像,根據攝影狀況,校正後重疊情況亦處於較差之關係之影像之情形時,選擇共通之影像內之任一者即可,為了製成全景影像亦可使用必需之不重疊之部分側之影像。Furthermore, there is also a case where, even in the case of an image having a mutual commonality, depending on the photographing condition and the image after the correction is in a poor relationship image, any one of the common images can be selected. In order to make a panoramic image, it is also possible to use an image of a portion of the side that does not overlap.

藉由利用根據世界座標之三維化之合成,整個齒列可顯示為所謂之義齒狀。By utilizing the three-dimensional synthesis according to the world coordinates, the entire dentition can be displayed as a so-called denture.

二維之齒側面之全景數位影像顯示、及三維之齒側面之全景數位影像顯示使得對患者而言可容易地理解患者之整體之齒列狀態,因此亦可形成如下態樣:例如將對二維全景齒列資料、三維全景齒列資料之各個實施矯正模擬處理、虛擬增白處理而形成虛擬齒列之狀態之影像並置於電腦螢幕上,使患者實際感覺到治療之效果等。The panoramic digital image display on the side of the two-dimensional tooth and the panoramic digital image display on the side of the three-dimensional tooth make it easy for the patient to understand the overall dentition state of the patient, and thus can also form the following aspects: for example, the second The panoramic dentition data and the three-dimensional panoramic dentition data are each subjected to a correction simulation process and a virtual whitening process to form an image of the state of the virtual dentition and placed on the computer screen so that the patient actually feels the effect of the treatment.

矯正模擬處理係指例如若為二維全景齒列影像,則預先根據部位製成一個齒之各種形狀之資料庫,形成矯正牙醫對二維全景齒列影像上之各個齒之影像於繪圖軟體上操作電腦滑鼠而進行拷貝黏貼,而形成之虛擬矯正全景齒列之手段。The correction simulation process refers to, for example, a two-dimensional panoramic dentition image, and a database of various shapes of one tooth is formed in advance according to the part, and the image of each tooth on the two-dimensional panoramic dentition image is formed on the drawing software by the corrective dentist. The computer mouse is used to copy and paste, and the virtual correction of the panoramic dentition is formed.

於全景三維齒列影像之情形時,已設定有三維座標,因此例示於既存之CAD軟體上,矯正牙醫等進行全景三維齒列影像之三維座標調整,而形成虛擬矯正三維全景齒列之手段。該等矯正全景顯示方法係例示,亦可採用其他方法。In the case of a panoramic three-dimensional dentition image, three-dimensional coordinates have been set, so that it is exemplified on the existing CAD software, and the corrective dentist performs the three-dimensional coordinate adjustment of the panoramic three-dimensional dentition image to form a virtual correction three-dimensional panoramic dentition. These corrective panoramic display methods are exemplified, and other methods may be employed.

對於患者之全景二維及三維齒列影像之虛擬增白處理後之虛擬顯示亦可並記牙醫對繪圖軟體上之該等影像進行顏色資料之調整所得者。如上所述於畫面上並設對患者患者之全景齒列進行虛擬矯正、虛擬著色處理所得者,藉此患者可加深治療之理解。The virtual display after the virtual whitening of the panoramic 2D and 3D dentition images of the patient may also be recorded by the dentist to adjust the color data of the images on the drawing software. As described above, the person who performs the virtual correction and the virtual coloring treatment on the panoramic dentition of the patient patient is provided on the screen, whereby the patient can deepen the understanding of the treatment.

照準光照射手段Specimen light irradiation

圖16係表示本發明之一實施例之圖。Figure 16 is a diagram showing an embodiment of the present invention.

A10係反射鏡單元,由硬質之塑膠等形成,於前端設置以既定角度(例如45度)設置之反射鏡A10K,於後端形成可與攝影單元A14之外周連接之圓筒狀之裝著部A10S,其中間成為開放之形狀。The A10-type mirror unit is formed of a hard plastic or the like, and is provided with a mirror A10K provided at a predetermined angle (for example, 45 degrees) at the front end, and a cylindrical mounting portion connectable to the outer periphery of the photographing unit A14 at the rear end. A10S, the middle of which becomes an open shape.

裝著部A10S與攝影單元A14之連接係以塞入之形式形成,脫離亦為僅可離開之程度即可,為了防止旋轉,亦可對兩者設置凹凸,或設為橢圓形等不對稱形狀。The connection between the mounting portion A10S and the photographing unit A14 is formed by being inserted, and the disengagement is also only possible to be separated. In order to prevent rotation, it is also possible to provide irregularities for both, or to form an asymmetrical shape such as an ellipse. .

A11係殼體,由塑膠、樹脂形成,具備口徑較大之圓珠筆般之圓筒狀且容易手持之形狀,於前端以突出之方式配置攝影單元A14,於後端連接用以與外部處理裝置連接之纜線A15。The A11 series housing is made of plastic or resin. It has a cylindrical ball-like shape with a large diameter and is easy to hold. The camera unit A14 is arranged at the front end and connected to the external processing device at the rear end. Cable A15.

A12係牙醫、牙科衛生員等直接觀察以既定角度配置於反射單元A10之前端之反射鏡A10K時之觀察方向。The A12 dentist, dental hygienist, and the like directly observe the observation direction when the mirror A10K at the front end of the reflection unit A10 is disposed at a predetermined angle.

A13係照準光照射面,為自照準用光源A142所輸出之照準光於反射鏡A10K進行反射而照射齒面時之照準光之照射面之一例。A13 is an example of an irradiation surface of the collimated light when the collimated light output from the self-illuminating light source A142 is reflected by the mirror A10K and irradiated to the tooth surface.

照準用光源A142之位置任意,若為可決定攝影影像之範圍之位置,則亦可為其他位置,上述部位係例如反射鏡單元A10之前端部,亦可為照明攝影範圍之部位。於該情形時,光程變短,因此亦有即便指向角度略微擴大亦可照明攝影影像之範圍之情形。The position of the sighting light source A142 is arbitrary, and if it is a position at which the range of the photographed image can be determined, it may be another position, for example, the front end portion of the mirror unit A10 or the portion of the illumination photographing range. In this case, since the optical path is shortened, there is a case where the range of the photographic image can be illuminated even if the pointing angle is slightly enlarged.

於圖16(c)中表示將攝影單元A14放大之狀態。A state in which the photographing unit A14 is enlarged is shown in Fig. 16 (c).

A141係照明用光源,具有廣範圍之指向角度,例示LED或透鏡與LED之組合。照明用光源A141係於攝影構件A143之周邊配置複數個。The A141 is a light source for illumination with a wide range of pointing angles, exemplifying a combination of LEDs or lenses and LEDs. The illumination light source A141 is disposed in plural numbers around the imaging member A143.

A142係照準用光源,例示藉由指向角度較小之LED或透鏡與LED之組合,進行可於照射面具有既定之範圍之輸出者。The A142 is a light source for illumination, and is exemplified by an LED having a small pointing angle or a combination of a lens and an LED to perform an output that can have a predetermined range on the illuminated surface.

又,於指向角度較小之光源之情形時,較佳為隔開複數既定之間隔而配置。Further, in the case of a light source having a small angle of pointing, it is preferably arranged at intervals of a predetermined number.

A143係攝影構件,由CCD、CMOS之攝影機形成,像素數較佳為更多者。The A143-type photographic member is formed by a CCD or CMOS camera, and the number of pixels is preferably more.

A15係用以與外部影像顯示機器連接之纜線,除如USB纜線般之通用纜線以外,亦可以專用之纜線而形成。The A15 is a cable for connecting to an external image display device. In addition to a universal cable such as a USB cable, it can also be formed by a dedicated cable.

A16a、A16b係操作用按鈕A、B,由按壓式、牽拉式或旋轉式等構成,若於各個按鈕中,按下操作用按鈕AA16a,則照準用光源A142發光既定時間,並經由反射鏡A10H照射主要部分僅固定時間。The A16a and A16b operation buttons A and B are composed of a push type, a pull type, or a rotary type. When the operation button AA16a is pressed for each button, the sight light source A142 emits light for a predetermined time and passes through the mirror. The main part of the A10H irradiation is only fixed for a fixed period of time.

固定時間係利用者至少可辨別照射口腔內之主要部分之照準光之時間,較佳為直至攝影之時序例如按下操作用按鈕AA16a等為止。The user can recognize at least the time of illuminating the main portion of the oral cavity at a fixed time, and it is preferable to press the operation button AA16a or the like until the timing of photographing.

於攝影時,由於形成與靜態影像不同之配色之照明部,故於妨礙觀察之方面不佳,於不妨礙觀察之情形時,無需特別消除照準用光,亦可為使其進行閃爍,而使利用者辨別者。In the case of photographing, since the illumination portion having a different color from the still image is formed, the observation is not preferable, and when the observation is not hindered, it is not necessary to particularly eliminate the collimated light, and the flicker may be caused to be flickered. User discriminator.

繼而,說明圖16所示之實施例之動作。Next, the operation of the embodiment shown in Fig. 16 will be described.

攝影單元A14之攝影構件A143之周邊之所裝著之照明用光源A141之照明輸出係經由反射鏡A10K照明口腔內之齒AH1。A14L為照準光光程。The illumination output of the illumination light source A141 mounted around the photographing member A143 of the photographing unit A14 illuminates the teeth AH1 in the oral cavity via the mirror A10K. A14L is the standard light path.

除此以外,照明用光源亦經由反射鏡A10K而照射,照明光面內之一部分成為形成有照準光照射面A13之狀態。In addition to this, the illumination light source is also irradiated via the mirror A10K, and one of the illumination light surfaces is in a state in which the illumination light irradiation surface A13 is formed.

攝影構件A143係經由反射鏡A10K輸入所照射之口腔內之部位,經由纜線A15,藉由外部螢幕裝置而進行顯示。The photographing member A143 is input to the portion of the irradiated oral cavity via the mirror A10K, and is displayed by the external screen device via the cable A15.

牙科醫師等利用者可利用外部螢幕裝置中所顯示之影像,掌握攝影位置,於縮短診療時間之情形或包含治療之情形時等,有多數情況下形成與牙鏡相同之使用,觀察方向如A12所示變為與攝影影像不同之狀態之情形,此時,按壓例如操作用按鈕AA16a。若按下操作用按鈕AA16a,則照準用光源A142進行發光,發光進行既定時間,較佳為於攝影開始前進行,以觀察者確認觀察位置與攝影位置之程度進行發光。A user such as a dentist can use the image displayed on the external screen device to grasp the position of the photographing, shorten the time of the treatment or include the treatment, and the like, in many cases, the same use as the dental mirror is observed, and the observation direction is A12. The display is in a state different from the photographic image. At this time, for example, the operation button AA16a is pressed. When the operation button AA16a is pressed, the illumination light source A142 emits light, and the light emission is performed for a predetermined period of time, preferably before the start of shooting, and the viewer observes the observation position and the photographing position to emit light.

觀察者為了使攝影位置與觀察位置一致而進行反射鏡A10K之移動,藉由再次按壓操作用按鈕AA16a,進行攝影位置與觀察位置之調整。The observer performs the movement of the mirror A10K in order to match the photographing position with the observation position, and adjusts the photographing position and the observation position by pressing the operation button AA16a again.

若定位結束,則藉由再次按壓操作用按鈕AA16a或操作用按鈕AB16b而進行靜態影像或動畫之記錄。上述操作用按鈕AA16a與操作用按鈕AB16b之操作內容係例示,可視情形適當選擇。When the positioning is completed, the still image or the animation is recorded by pressing the operation button AA16a or the operation button AB16b again. The operation contents of the operation button AA16a and the operation button AB16b are exemplified, and may be appropriately selected depending on the situation.

將上述一例示於圖16(b)。The above example is shown in Fig. 16(b).

A17係影像之一例,攝影有作為攝影目的之齒AH1。照準光之照射範圍係照準光照射面A13所示之圓之範圍,包含以攝影為目的之主要部分之大致全部。An example of the A17 image is a tooth AH1 for photography purposes. The irradiation range of the illuminating light is a range of a circle indicated by the illuminating surface A13, and includes substantially all of the main parts for the purpose of photography.

光照射面A13之範圍係殼體A11及反射鏡單元A10之組合,藉由相對於齒H1上下移動而發生變化,使用者使殼體A11及反射鏡單元A10上下顛倒,進行調整即可,較攝影範圍變大或變小,不會自攝影範圍之主要部分偏移,又,較點光源,充分表示攝影範圍之主要部分。The range of the light-irradiating surface A13 is a combination of the casing A11 and the mirror unit A10, and is changed by moving up and down with respect to the tooth H1, and the user can reverse the casing A11 and the mirror unit A10 upside down and adjust. The range of photography becomes larger or smaller, does not shift from the main part of the photographing range, and is more representative of the main part of the photographing range than the point source.

藉由以上之操作,調整攝影面與觀察面,進行準確之靜態影像或動畫之記錄。Through the above operations, the photographic and observation surfaces are adjusted to record accurate still images or animations.

手持圖16(a)所示之殼體A11,對口腔內之觀察部位,以捕獲作為目的之部位之方式縱橫地移動反射鏡A10K而進行觀察攝影。By holding the casing A11 shown in Fig. 16(a), the observation portion in the oral cavity is vertically and horizontally moved by the mirror A10K so as to capture the target portion, and observation is performed.

口腔內攝影機係插入於口腔內之上顎或下顎之窄且深之部位等,反射鏡之攝影範圍遍及廣範圍並且於反射鏡為顛倒之狀態下攝影口腔內。即便為傾斜狀態、面向一側等亦進行攝影,因此攝影影像亦傾斜或顛倒。The intraoral camera is inserted into a narrow and deep portion of the upper or lower jaw of the oral cavity, and the scope of the mirror is spread over a wide range and the oral cavity is photographed in a state where the mirror is inverted. Even if the image is tilted, facing one side, etc., the photographic image is also tilted or reversed.

因此,本發明謀求如下情況:其具備藉由位置感測器檢測攝影狀態,對影像上下相反之狀態或傾斜之狀態將其修整為水平之影像修整手段。Therefore, the present invention has a case where it is provided with an image refining means for detecting a photographing state by a position sensor and trimming it to a horizontal state in a state in which the image is upside down or tilted.

攝影影像修正手段Photographic correction method

圖17係為了說明本發明之一實施例而使用之口腔內攝影機之一例,以剖面圖之形式表示一部分。Fig. 17 is a cross-sectional view showing an example of an intra-oral camera used to explain an embodiment of the present invention.

A21係握持用之殼體,具有具備內部空間之圓柱狀,由攝影機與形成於攝影機之周邊之照明用光源所構成之橢圓筒狀之攝影單元A23於較殼體A21更突出之狀態下連接於前端,用以與外部顯示裝置連結之纜線A26連接於後端。The housing for gripping the A21 has a cylindrical shape having an internal space, and the elliptical cylindrical photographing unit A23 formed by the camera and the illumination light source formed around the camera is connected in a state of being protruded more than the housing A21. At the front end, a cable A26 for connecting to an external display device is connected to the rear end.

將照明單元之一例示於圖16(c)。One of the illumination units is illustrated in Fig. 16(c).

A22係反射鏡單元,裝著有以既定角度配置於前端之反射鏡A22H,於後端,形成可以覆蓋攝影單元A23之周邊之方式裝著之圓筒狀之裝著部A22S,除此以外成為開放之狀態。The A22-type mirror unit is provided with a mirror A22H that is disposed at a predetermined angle at the front end, and a cylindrical mounting portion A22S that is attached to the periphery of the photographing unit A23 at the rear end, and is otherwise formed. Open state.

A24係電路基板,裝著於殼體A21內部,安裝有影像處理用IC等。A25a、A25b係位置感測器,具有安裝於電路基板之IC晶片狀。位置感測器之個數、安裝部位為一例,根據感測器之類型,亦有不安裝之情形。The A24-type circuit board is mounted inside the casing A21, and an image processing IC or the like is mounted. The A25a and A25b position sensors have an IC wafer shape mounted on a circuit board. The number of position sensors and the mounting location are examples. Depending on the type of sensor, there is also a case where it is not installed.

位置感測器A25a、A25b係加速度感測器、角速度感測器等,口腔內攝影機可獲得廣範圍之移動狀態,因此採用根據角度,不會成為無法計測之狀態之感測器元件。將位置感測器之個數表示為2個,為例示,根據軸之數量,晶片之數量發生變化,亦有若有3軸用之單元,則為一個之情形。The position sensors A25a and A25b are acceleration sensors, angular velocity sensors, etc., and the intraoral camera can obtain a wide range of movement states. Therefore, sensor elements that do not become unmeasurable depending on the angle are used. The number of position sensors is expressed as two. For the sake of illustration, the number of wafers varies depending on the number of axes, and there is also a case where there are three axes.

加速度感測器及角速度感測器例示3軸之感測器,亦有位置感測器之個數亦利用軸之數量等而調整之情形。The acceleration sensor and the angular velocity sensor exemplify a three-axis sensor, and the number of position sensors is also adjusted by the number of axes.

位置感測器A25a、A25b‧‧之x軸、y軸、z軸例示例如圖19所示之軸。Examples of the x-axis, y-axis, and z-axis of the position sensors A25a and A25b‧ are shown as the axes shown in FIG.

於將位置感測器A25a、A25b設為角速度感測器(陀螺儀感測器)之情形時,角速度感測器分別輸出例如分別因圍繞x軸之移動引起之角度之變化量、因圍繞y軸之移動引起之角度之變化量、及因圍繞z軸之移動引起之角度之變化量。In the case where the position sensors A25a, A25b are set as angular velocity sensors (gyro sensors), the angular velocity sensors respectively output, for example, the amount of change due to the movement around the x-axis, respectively, due to the surrounding y The amount of change in the angle caused by the movement of the axis, and the amount of change in the angle caused by the movement around the z-axis.

於角速度感測器之情形時,於任意設定x軸、y軸及z軸之初始狀態之狀態下,累計各個軸之變化量,檢測攝影機之攝影狀態。In the case of the angular velocity sensor, the amount of change of each axis is accumulated in a state where the initial state of the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis is arbitrarily set, and the photographing state of the camera is detected.

與此相對,加速度感測器分別輸出x軸方向之加速度成分、y軸方向之加速度成分、z軸方向之加速度成分。進而,該等加速度成分之合成向量輸出姿勢向量,於處於靜止狀態時,分別表示重力加速度向量。根據該姿勢向量,可獲得攝影機之攝影狀態。On the other hand, the acceleration sensor outputs an acceleration component in the x-axis direction, an acceleration component in the y-axis direction, and an acceleration component in the z-axis direction. Further, the composite vector output posture vector of the acceleration components respectively represents the gravity acceleration vector when in a stationary state. According to the posture vector, the photographing state of the camera can be obtained.

例如加速度感測器係為了於靜止時,將重力加速度向量之狀態作為姿勢向量而輸出,可利用將該狀態下之x軸方向、y軸方向、z軸方向之向量作為基準姿勢,然後使用角速度感測器進行累計各個軸之旋轉變化量等運算之方法等,因此亦可藉由組合加速度感測器與角速度感測器兩者,檢測攝影機之各種狀態。For example, in order to stop the acceleration sensor, the state of the gravity acceleration vector is output as a posture vector, and the vector in the x-axis direction, the y-axis direction, and the z-axis direction in this state can be used as the reference posture, and then the angular velocity can be used. Since the sensor performs a method of calculating the amount of change in the rotation of each axis, etc., it is also possible to detect various states of the camera by combining both the acceleration sensor and the angular velocity sensor.

圖18係表示使用位置感測器修整影像顯示狀態之手段之一例之方塊圖。該方塊圖中所示之構成若為電腦處理,則亦可為具有由程式所執行之部分者。Fig. 18 is a block diagram showing an example of a means for trimming an image display state using a position sensor. The configuration shown in the block diagram may also be part of the execution of the program if it is computer processing.

A31係攝影手段,表示利用配置於圖17之攝影單元A23之中心之攝影機攝影動畫、靜態影像之手段。The A31 system photographing means means for photographing an animation or a still image using a camera disposed at the center of the photographing unit A23 of Fig. 17.

A32係影像修整手段,由影像記錄記憶體、CPU(Central等構成,暫時記錄利用攝影手段A31所獲得之影像,根據位置檢測手段A34之攝影機角度資訊,使影像旋轉而形成容易觀察之狀態之影像資料。The A32 image processing method consists of a video recording memory, a CPU (Central, etc., temporarily recording an image obtained by the photographing means A31, and rotating the image according to the camera angle information of the position detecting means A34 to form an image which is easy to observe. data.

例如,於攝影單元A23進行攝影,規定放映於螢幕之影像之基準姿勢,相對於上述基準姿勢移動殼體,藉此基準姿勢影像旋轉之情形時,例如角速度感測器等根據各個軸中之角速度,檢測旋轉角度之變化量,僅以減去上述旋轉角度變化量部分所得之角度使影像旋轉並使其顯示,藉此可形成容易觀察之影像。For example, the photographing unit A23 performs photographing, defines a reference posture of the image projected on the screen, and moves the casing with respect to the reference posture. When the reference posture image is rotated, for example, an angular velocity sensor or the like according to an angular velocity in each axis. The amount of change in the rotation angle is detected, and the image is rotated and displayed only by subtracting the angle obtained by the portion of the rotation angle change, thereby forming an image that is easy to observe.

再者,亦有僅利用圍繞圖19所示之y軸之旋轉,可進行影像之修整之情形。Furthermore, there is also a case where the image can be trimmed using only the rotation around the y-axis shown in Fig. 19.

於攝影由反射鏡反射之口腔內之像之情形時,攝影單元A23之攝影機始終朝向反射鏡方向,因此影像進行旋轉之原因在於:主要進行伴隨以圖19所示之y軸座標為中心之殼體之旋轉之旋轉。In the case of photographing an image in the oral cavity reflected by the mirror, the camera of the photographing unit A23 always faces the mirror direction, and therefore the image is rotated because the shell mainly centered on the y-axis coordinate shown in Fig. 19 is mainly performed. The rotation of the body.

因此,亦有如下之情形:較佳為至少於殼體A11及反射鏡單元A10於x軸、y軸及z軸方向上發生變化之狀態下,將放映於xz平面上之影像修正為於影像顯示部中朝向固定方向之狀態。Therefore, there is also a case where it is preferable to correct the image projected on the xz plane to the image at least in a state in which the housing A11 and the mirror unit A10 are changed in the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis direction. The state in which the display portion faces the fixed direction.

33係影像顯示手段,表示電腦之螢幕、其他專用之螢幕,為顯示影像修正整手段A32之輸出影像者即可。The 33-series image display means that the screen of the computer and other dedicated screens can be used to display the output image of the image correcting means A32.

A34係位置檢測手段,由圖17之位置感測器A25a、A25b等構成,具體而言,可利用輸出角速度之速率陀螺儀、輸出角度之速率積分陀螺儀、姿勢陀螺儀、MEMS型及其他機械式、光學式等角速度感測器、壓阻型、靜電電容型、熱偵測型之MEMS感測器等加速度感測器。The A34 system position detecting means is composed of position sensors A25a, A25b, etc. of Fig. 17, specifically, a rate gyro output angle, an output angle rate integrating gyro, a posture gyro, a MEMS type, and other machines. Acceleration sensors such as optical, isometric speed sensors, piezoresistive, electrostatic capacitance, and thermal detection type MEMS sensors.

繼而,使用圖17、圖19說明圖18之動作。Next, the operation of FIG. 18 will be described using FIG. 17 and FIG.

圖19所示之座標軸係表示一個位置感測器對應於3軸之情形者,於位置感測器分別以1軸、2軸等對應之情形時,設定對應於位置感測器之每一部位之座標軸。The coordinate axis shown in FIG. 19 indicates that one position sensor corresponds to the three-axis. When the position sensor corresponds to one axis, two axes, etc., the position corresponding to the position sensor is set. The coordinate axis.

手持圖17所示之殼體A21,將反射鏡A22H插入口腔內攝影作為目的之部位。此時,操作安裝於殼體A21上之開關等而記錄初始姿勢狀態。以圖19之A410表示預期姿勢狀態下之座標之一例。The housing A21 shown in Fig. 17 is hand-held, and the mirror A22H is inserted into the oral cavity for the purpose of photography. At this time, the initial posture state is recorded by operating a switch or the like attached to the casing A21. An example of the coordinates in the expected posture state is shown by A410 of Fig. 19.

藉由位置感測器之設置形成座標軸。於本實施例中,A421設為x軸,A431設為y軸,A441設為z軸。The coordinate axis is formed by the setting of the position sensor. In the present embodiment, A421 is set to the x-axis, A431 is set to the y-axis, and A441 is set to the z-axis.

再者,A451係重力加速度向量,為加速度感測器之靜止時之所合成之姿勢向量之一例。因此,有重力加速度向量係於未使用加速度感測器時無法利用之情形。Furthermore, the A451 gravitational acceleration vector is an example of a pose vector synthesized by the acceleration sensor at rest. Therefore, there is a case where the gravitational acceleration vector is not available when the acceleration sensor is not used.

表示口腔內攝影機係例如為了攝影臼齒之側面而接近直立之狀態下之座標。The intra-oral camera is a coordinate that is close to an upright state, for example, in order to photograph the side of the molar.

A422為x軸,A432表示y軸,A442表示z軸,於使用加速度感測器之情形時,A452可表示重力加速度向量。A422 is the x-axis, A432 is the y-axis, and A442 is the z-axis. When the acceleration sensor is used, A452 can represent the gravitational acceleration vector.

使反射鏡22H向口腔內之作為目的之部位移動。以圖19表示移動方法之一例。由反射鏡22H及殼體所構成之口腔內攝影機係如A411、A412、A413所示般縱橫地移動,攝影手段A31係以靜態影像、動畫攝影各個狀態下之口腔內影像並輸出至影像修整手段A32。The mirror 22H is moved to a target portion in the oral cavity. An example of the moving method is shown in FIG. The intra-oral camera constituted by the mirror 22H and the casing moves vertically and horizontally as shown by A411, A412, and A413, and the imaging means A31 is an intra-oral image in each state of still image or animation, and is output to the image trimming means. A32.

位置檢測手段A34係例如相對於x、y、z方向之各個將初始姿勢資訊輸出至影像修整手段A32。再者,如本實施例般,於顯示反射鏡之影像之構成之情形時,攝影機朝向反射鏡方向,因此多數情況下攝影機影像進行反轉而成為不易看見之狀態之主要原因在於圍繞y軸之旋轉,因此亦有亦可僅利用1軸型之位置感測器之情形。影像修整手段A32係使該初始姿勢資訊與影像對應,輸出至影像顯示手段A33並使其顯示。The position detecting means A34 outputs the initial posture information to the image trimming means A32, for example, with respect to each of the x, y, and z directions. Furthermore, as in the case of the present embodiment, when the image of the mirror is displayed, the camera is oriented in the direction of the mirror. Therefore, in many cases, the camera image is inverted and becomes invisible. The main reason is that the y-axis is around the y-axis. Since it is rotated, it is also possible to use only a 1-axis type position sensor. The image trimming means A32 associates the initial posture information with the image, and outputs it to the image display means A33 for display.

如圖19所示,於如A411、A412、A413般移動口腔內攝影機,攝影口腔內之情形時,攝影手段A31輸出與各個姿勢相對應之影像。若攝影機以y軸為中心進行旋轉,則影像係顛倒地攝影,並輸出與攝影狀態相對應之影像。As shown in FIG. 19, when the intraoral camera is moved like A411, A412, and A413, and the inside of the oral cavity is photographed, the photographing means A31 outputs an image corresponding to each posture. If the camera rotates around the y-axis, the image is photographed upside down and an image corresponding to the photographing state is output.

位置檢測手段A34利用位置感測器A25a、A25b(例如陀螺儀感測器之情形)分別檢測圍繞x軸、y軸、z軸之角速度,利用該角速度檢測圍繞x軸之角度之變化量(△θyz)、圍繞y軸之角度之變化量(△θxz)、及圍繞z軸之角度之變化量(△θxy)。The position detecting means A34 detects the angular velocities around the x-axis, the y-axis, and the z-axis using position sensors A25a, A25b (for example, the case of a gyro sensor), and detects the amount of change in the angle around the x-axis by using the angular velocity (? Θyz), the amount of change in the angle around the y-axis (Δθxz), and the amount of change in the angle around the z-axis (Δθxy).

將該等變化量向影像修整手段A32輸出。影像修整手段A32根據自攝影手段A31所輸入之影像資料與自位置檢測手段34所輸出之位置資訊,例如根據角度之變化量旋轉影像,返回至最初之影像之狀態。These changes are output to the image trimming means A32. The image trimming means A32 returns the image to the original image based on the image data input from the photographing means A31 and the position information output from the position detecting means 34, for example, based on the amount of change in the angle.

因此,影像顯示手段A33即便使攝影機旋轉而以動畫、靜態影像攝影相同之口腔內對象物,影像亦可始終在最初之設定狀態下進行顯示內容影像發生變化之顯示。Therefore, even if the image display means A33 rotates the camera to capture the same object in the mouth with the animation or the still image, the image can always be displayed in the first set state.

再者,於使用凸面鏡攝影上顎、下顎之全齒之情形時,亦可應用利用文獻(Design Wave Magazine 2008 December P113-115)中記載之方法之魚眼鏡頭修正手段。Furthermore, in the case of using a convex mirror to photograph the full teeth of the jaws and the jaws, a fisheye lens correction means using the method described in the document (Design Wave Magazine 2008 December P113-115) can also be applied.

攝影動作時序調整手段Photographic motion timing adjustment

本發明將獲得實體影像時所操作之開關之按壓方法,以例如電腦操作時進行之如雙擊方法之固定時間內按壓之次數,調整為直至實際攝影為止之時間,從而於牙醫之治療時、檢查時及患者說明時,可謀求攝影機操作之穩定化。又,亦可指定表示於螢幕影像上操作攝影機之開關而顯示攝影動作時序之時序之圖示之顯示(例如2次2秒,然後連攝數次),而決定上述時序。According to the present invention, the method of pressing the switch operated when the physical image is obtained is adjusted to the time until the actual photography is performed, for example, the number of times of pressing in a fixed time, such as a double-click method, during computer operation, so as to be inspected by the dentist during the treatment. At the time of the patient's explanation, the camera operation can be stabilized. Further, it is also possible to specify a display (for example, two times and two seconds, and then several consecutive shots) indicating that the switch of the camera is operated on the screen image to display the timing of the shooting operation timing, and the timing is determined.

又,於在畫面上進行座標等顯示功能之情形時,當根據操作按鈕之按壓次數或按壓方法等,調整顯示之時序,藉此一面將攝影機插入口腔內一面進行說明時,亦可調整影像顯示之時序。具體之時序之規格亦可自移動終端機之畫面輸入並調整。Further, when a display function such as a coordinate is performed on the screen, the timing of the display is adjusted according to the number of times of pressing the operation button, the pressing method, or the like, and the image display can be adjusted when the camera is inserted into the oral cavity for explanation. Timing. The specific timing specifications can also be input and adjusted from the screen of the mobile terminal.

參照圖20詳細說明時序調整手段之一例。An example of the timing adjustment means will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 20 .

於圖20中,B7001係輸入手段,表示例如構成圖1之操作用介面之按鈕101d、101e。In Fig. 20, B7001 is an input means for indicating, for example, buttons 101d and 101e constituting the operation interface of Fig. 1.

B7002係輸入次數檢測手段,由計數器、正反器等構成,計數按下按鈕之次數。該計數較佳為於既定時間間隔內進行計數。The B7002 is a method for detecting the number of input times, and is composed of a counter, a flip-flop, and the like, and counts the number of times the button is pressed. Preferably, the count is counted over a predetermined time interval.

B7003係延遲手段,為用以將上述按壓次數與每按壓1次之延遲時間相乘而設定延遲時間者。經過延遲時間後,輸出一個脈衝。The B7003 is a delay means for setting the delay time by multiplying the number of presses by the delay time per press. After the delay time, a pulse is output.

B7004係攝影輸出設定手段,於上述延遲手段B7003之延遲脈衝下降時,將開始攝影之信號向攝影手段B7005輸出。The B7004 is a photographing output setting means that outputs a signal for starting photographing to the photographing means B7005 when the delay pulse of the delay means B7003 falls.

攝影手段B7005根據攝影開始之信號,進行數張至數十張之靜態影像之連攝或動畫攝影。The photographing means B7005 performs continuous or animated photographing of several to several tens of still images based on the signal of the start of photographing.

藉由該攝影所獲得之影像係輸入至影像輸入手段B7006,進而,利用影像選定手段B7007,選出有焦點之影像,利用保存顯示手段B7008保存或顯示於圖1所示之顯示器104。The image obtained by the photographing is input to the image input means B7006, and the image having the focus is selected by the image selecting means B7007, and stored or displayed on the display 104 shown in FIG. 1 by the storage display means B7008.

B7006係影像輸入手段,為用以將利用攝影手段B7005所獲得之影像作為數位資料而獲取並向影像選定手段B7007輸出者。The B7006 is an image input means for acquiring an image obtained by the photographing means B7005 as digital data and outputting it to the image selecting means B7007.

B7007係影像選定手段,為用以僅選出例如有焦點之影像之手段。The B7007 is an image selection means for selecting only images having a focus, for example.

B7009係顯示手段,其係改變閃爍位置而於視覺上通知按下輸入手段B7001之按鈕後直至執行為止之構成等。The B7009 is a display means for visually notifying the configuration of pressing the button of the input means B7001 until the execution is performed, by changing the blinking position.

顯示手段B7009係於牙科醫師治療時配置於醒目之場所,且顯示按下操作按鈕後,之後幾秒後開始動作者,亦有顯示於作為顯示手段B7009之一個之電腦之螢幕上之情形。The display means B7009 is placed in a conspicuous place during the treatment of the dentist, and after the operation button is pressed, the author is started a few seconds later, and the display is also displayed on the screen of the computer as one of the display means B7009.

又,於延遲時間期間,顏色為紅色,藉由設置若延遲時間結束則向白色變化之LED或僅於延遲時間中連續發光、閃爍發光之光源等使用者可辨別為延遲時間中之指示器,可進行有餘裕之按鈕操作,並且可擴大口腔內作業之幅度。Moreover, during the delay time, the color is red, and the user can recognize the indicator in the delay time by setting the LED that changes to white when the delay time ends or the light source that continuously emits light or blinks only in the delay time. There is ample button operation and the range of intraoral operations can be expanded.

X光攝影手段X-ray photography

圖21(a)係表示本發明之實施例之方塊圖。Figure 21 (a) is a block diagram showing an embodiment of the present invention.

B8011係X光影像攝影手段,例示X光輸出裝置與X光CCD感測器之組合或X光輸出裝置與X光螢光板及CMOS或CCD攝影機之組合。具體而言,於圖2中表示一例。The B8011 is an X-ray imaging means, exemplifying a combination of an X-ray output device and an X-ray CCD sensor or a combination of an X-ray output device and an X-ray fluorescent plate and a CMOS or CCD camera. Specifically, an example is shown in FIG.

於X光影像攝影手段中,亦包含既存之全景X光攝影裝置、X光CT(Computed Tomography,電腦斷層攝影)、牙科X光裝置等,至少可以資料之形式顯示於電腦螢幕上即可。於無法直接取得打開之X光影像資料之情形時,亦可作為附隨於電腦之經X光影像閱覽化之資料、畫面之硬拷貝資料、螢幕畫面共有狀態下之資料、利用口腔內攝影機攝影螢幕上之X光影像而獲得之資料等X光影像資料而取得。進而,亦有包含圖21(b)之構成之情形。In the X-ray imaging method, the existing panoramic X-ray imaging device, X-ray CT (Computed Tomography), dental X-ray device, etc. are also included, and at least the data can be displayed on the computer screen. When it is not possible to directly obtain the X-ray image data that is opened, it can also be used as a data copying of the X-ray image attached to the computer, a hard copy of the screen, a data in a common state of the screen image, and a photography screen using the intraoral camera. Obtained from the X-ray image data obtained from the X-ray image. Further, there is a case where the configuration of Fig. 21 (b) is included.

B8012係實體影像攝影手段,較佳地使用例如反射型之口腔內攝影機。The B8012 is a solid image photographing means, and preferably, for example, a reflective intraoral camera.

有實體影像攝影手段B8012進而包含圖21(c)所示之構成之情形。The physical image capturing means B8012 further includes the configuration shown in Fig. 21 (c).

B8013係比較部位抽取手段,由區塊匹配方法、子像素推斷方法所形成,為用以為了抽取與由X光影像攝影手段B8011攝影之影像一致之部分,而抽取比較部位者,且為進行例如所攝影之影像之輪廓抽取、複數之像素值之抽取而輸出X光影像抽取資料者。The B8013 is a comparison portion extracting means formed by a block matching method and a sub-pixel estimation method, and is a method for extracting a comparison portion for extracting a portion corresponding to the image photographed by the X-ray image capturing means B8011, and for performing, for example, The contour of the captured image is extracted, and the pixel values of the complex number are extracted, and the X-ray image is extracted.

B8014係比較部位抽取手段,由區塊匹配方法、子像素推斷方法等所形成,為用以為了抽取與由實體影像攝影手段B8012所攝影之影像一致之部分,而抽取比較部位者,且為進行例如所攝影之影像之輪廓抽取、複數之像素值之抽取而輸出實體影像抽取資料者。The B8014 is a comparison portion extracting means formed by a block matching method, a sub-pixel estimation method, or the like, and is a method for extracting a comparison portion for extracting a portion corresponding to the image photographed by the solid image capturing means B8012, and performing For example, the contour of the captured image is extracted, and the pixel values of the complex number are extracted to output the physical image extraction data.

B8015係比較手段,比較自各個比較部位抽取手段所輸出之抽取資料,將一致、大致一致、推斷一致之部位作為一致部而輸出。The B8015 is a comparison means that compares the extracted data outputted from each of the comparison site extraction means, and outputs a portion that is consistent, substantially identical, and inferred to be a uniform portion.

有於進行比較時,放大、縮小影像之情形,其係例如將實體影像、X光影像資料轉換為BMP、JPEG、GIF等通用形式而藉由通用之繪圖軟體進行放大縮小處理即可。In the case of comparing and zooming in and out of the image, it is possible to convert the physical image and the X-ray image data into a general form such as BMP, JPEG, GIF, etc., and perform enlargement and reduction processing by a general drawing software.

B8016係一致部記錄手段,記錄一致之部位、大致一致之部位或推斷一致部位,並且向顯示手段B8017傳送。The B8016 is a matching unit recording means, and records the matching portion, the substantially identical portion, or the estimated matching portion, and transmits it to the display means B8017.

B8017係顯示手段,例示電腦之螢幕(顯示器)裝置、行動電話顯示部等,有以至少可進行X光影像與實體影像之並置顯示、重疊之顯示之程度之大小,清晰地顯示X光影像之程度之解析度即可。The B8017 is a display means for exemplifying a screen (display) device of a computer, a mobile phone display unit, and the like, and is capable of clearly displaying an X-ray image at least in such a manner that at least the display of the X-ray image and the physical image is displayed in a superimposed manner and overlapped. The degree of resolution can be.

本實施例係藉由電腦軟體而實現,亦可藉由硬體形成。This embodiment is realized by a computer software, and can also be formed by a hardware.

X光影像攝影手段與實體影像攝影手段亦可為分開之裝置,但更佳為將一個裝置之一部分交換而共有之狀態。The X-ray imaging method and the physical image capturing means may also be separate devices, but it is more preferably a state in which one of the devices is partially exchanged and shared.

對本實施例之動作進行說明。The operation of this embodiment will be described.

藉由X光影像攝影手段B8011,以動畫或靜態影像攝影測定部位。X光影像攝影手段B8011進行測定之部位係藉由一個齒、複數之齒、或上顎、下顎之全齒等之選擇等而進行。The portion is measured by animated or still image photography by X-ray imaging means B8011. The portion to be measured by the X-ray imaging means B8011 is performed by selecting one tooth, a plurality of teeth, or a full tooth of the upper jaw, the lower jaw, or the like.

繼而,利用實體影像攝影手段B8012,以動畫或靜態影像攝影X光影像攝影手段B8011所攝影之部位。Then, using the physical image capturing means B8012, the portion photographed by the X-ray image capturing means B8011 is photographed by animation or still image.

亦可準確地定位而攝影相同之部位,亦可按照基準進行攝影。It can also be accurately positioned and photographed in the same part, and can also be photographed according to the standard.

修正自兩者所獲得之影像之畸變。修正之方法可為例如校準方法,預先攝影成為基準之網格,算出因透鏡引起之畸變值,修正資料。Correct the distortion of the image obtained from both. The correction method may be, for example, a calibration method in which a pre-shooting is used as a reference grid, and a distortion value due to the lens is calculated to correct the data.

繼而,利用比較部位抽取手段B8013、B8014,算出特徵部位。特徵部位係例如輪廓,分別抽取X光之情形時之牙齒之輪廓與實體影像之牙齒之輪廓之一部分或全部。Then, the feature portion is calculated by the comparison portion extracting means B8013 and B8014. The feature portion is, for example, a contour, which extracts part or all of the outline of the tooth in the case of X-ray and the contour of the tooth of the solid image.

繼而,比較兩者之輪廓。此時,X光影像與實體影像係於輪廓之一部分一致之狀態或大致一致之狀態下,取出兩影像之重疊之部位。Then, compare the outlines of the two. At this time, the X-ray image and the solid image are in a state in which one of the contours is identical or substantially coincident, and the overlapping portions of the two images are taken out.

比較手段B8015將該重複之兩影像向一致部記錄手段B8016輸出,一致部記錄手段B8016記錄兩影像。The comparing means B8015 outputs the two duplicated images to the matching portion recording means B8016, and the matching portion recording means B8016 records the two images.

顯示手段B8017根據使用者之選擇,顯示兩影像,於穿透狀態下重疊或並置。The display means B8017 displays two images according to the user's selection, and overlaps or juxtaposes in the penetrating state.

圖23表示由X光影像攝影手段及實體影像攝影手段所攝影之影像之一例。圖23(a)係X光影像,表示進行X光攝影所得之齒b101。(b)表示於與(a)相同之部位進行攝影所得之實體影像之齒b102。Fig. 23 shows an example of an image photographed by an X-ray image capturing means and a solid image capturing means. Fig. 23(a) is an X-ray image showing the tooth b101 obtained by X-ray imaging. (b) shows the tooth b102 of the solid image obtained by photographing at the same portion as (a).

(c)係表示重疊該等而顯示之重複影像b103者。藉由X光影像與實體影像之對比,可容易地理解X光影像。(c) is a person who displays the repeated image b103 displayed by superimposing these. X-ray images can be easily understood by comparing X-ray images with solid images.

尤其,利用實體影像顯示可顯示有無齒齦之色、腫脹、炎症,因此藉由與X光影像之對應,可使患者容易知道牙周病、蛀牙之發展程度或有無而進行顯示。In particular, the physical image display can show the presence or absence of color, swelling, and inflammation of the gums. Therefore, by cooperating with the X-ray image, the patient can easily display the periodontal disease, the degree of development of the tooth decay, or the presence or absence of the tooth decay.

繼而,將X光影像攝影手段之具體例示於圖22並詳細說明。Next, a specific example of the X-ray imaging means will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

於圖22中,B9101係握持用殼體,為了X光不穿透較佳為由含有鉛之塑膠材料等形成。In Fig. 22, the B9101 is a holding case, and it is preferably formed of a lead-containing plastic material or the like for the purpose of preventing the X-ray from penetrating.

B9102係X光輸出裝置,較佳為普通之牙科用之可攜式之製成品,但並無特別限制,若為牙科診療中所使用之X光輸出裝置,則可功能性地充分利用,可攜式即便於在家診療等亦有效,對於與實體影像併用之X光影像之利用較佳。即便為可攜式,亦可裝著於支架而使用。The B9102 is an X-ray output device, preferably a portable portable product for dental use, but is not particularly limited. If it is an X-ray output device used in dental treatment, it can be fully utilized functionally. The portable type is effective even at home, and is preferably used for X-ray images combined with physical images. Even if it is portable, it can be used in a stand.

B9103係電導線,使用通用之USB纜線,除此以外亦可利用專用之纜線等。The B9103 is an electric conductor, and a universal USB cable is used. In addition to this, a dedicated cable or the like can be used.

B9104係X光用螢光體,使用於玻璃基板上,使螢光材料CsI、CaWO、Gd2O2S:Tb3+、549 nm(f-f)、(Zn、Cd)s:Ag晶體成長所得者、進行塗布所得者等。B9104 is a X-ray phosphor used on a glass substrate to grow phosphorescent materials CsI, CaWO, Gd 2 O 2 S: Tb 3+ , 549 nm (ff), (Zn, Cd) s:Ag crystals. Those who have been coated, etc.

B9105係可見光穿透構件,由含鉛之透光性構件形成,為用以僅使可見光穿透者。The B9105 is a visible light penetrating member formed of a light-transmitting member containing lead and used to penetrate only visible light.

B9106係攝影單元,於該情形時,亦可僅利用攝影機,較佳為使用更高解像度者。The B9106 is a photographing unit. In this case, it is also possible to use only a camera, and it is preferable to use a higher resolution.

B9107係X光攝影用支承構件,由含鉛之X光不穿透構件形成,於前端裝著反射鏡B9108、X光用螢光體B9104等,另一端係為了插入固定於攝影單元B9106之周圍而形成開放之筒狀。The B9107 X-ray imaging support member is formed of a lead-free X-ray non-penetrating member, and has a mirror B9108, an X-ray phosphor B9104, and the like attached to the tip end, and the other end is inserted and fixed around the photographing unit B9106. And the formation of an open cylinder.

B9108係反射鏡,於傾斜例如45度之狀態下形成,且由平面狀之鏡所形成,為用以使投下X光後之經可視化之影像反射,並向攝影單元B9106傳遞者。The B9108-based mirror is formed at a state of, for example, 45 degrees, and is formed by a planar mirror, and is a reflection image for reflecting the X-rays and transmitted to the photographing unit B9106.

(a)係利用X光螢光體B9104將自X光輸出裝置所輸出之X光轉換成可見光,然後,去除X光成分,由反射鏡B9108反射後,輸入至攝影單元。(a) X-rays output from the X-ray output device are converted into visible light by the X-ray phosphor B9104, and then the X-ray component is removed, reflected by the mirror B9108, and then input to the imaging unit.

B9109係攝影部位之口腔內之齒列略圖所示者。B9109 is the outline of the tooth in the oral cavity of the photographic part.

(b)係組合利用X光感測器之X光相片影像與利用反射鏡之實體影像之實施例。(b) An embodiment in which an X-ray image of an X-ray sensor and a solid image using a mirror are combined.

B9110係X光攝影用支承構件,與圖2所示之X光攝影用支承構件B9107同樣地由X光不穿透構件所形成。The B9110-based X-ray imaging support member is formed of an X-ray non-penetrating member similarly to the X-ray imaging support member B9107 shown in Fig. 2 .

B9111係可見光穿透構件,由含鉛之透光性構件形成,為用以去除X光,將可見光向攝影單元B9106傳遞之濾波器。The B9111 visible light penetrating member is formed of a light-transmitting member containing lead, and is a filter for removing X-rays and transmitting visible light to the imaging unit B9106.

B9112係反射鏡,為平面狀之鏡,B9113係X光感測器,由既成之X光CCD(CMOS)感測器、成像板所形成。The B9112 is a mirror, a flat mirror, and the B9113 X-ray sensor is formed by a built-in X-ray CMOS (CMOS) sensor and imaging plate.

B9114係將X光感測器之感測器信號向外部傳遞之導線,較佳為其亦由含鉛之樹脂被覆。B9114 is a wire that transmits the sensor signal of the X-ray sensor to the outside, preferably it is also covered with a lead-containing resin.

本實施例除X光感測器B9113以外,具有用以藉由反射鏡單元與攝影單元B9106之組合之併用,於相同之時序輸出X光可見光影像與實體影像之構成。In addition to the X-ray sensor B9113, the present embodiment has a configuration for outputting X-ray visible light images and solid images at the same timing by the combination of the mirror unit and the photographing unit B9106.

組合反射鏡B9112與X光感測器B9113之構成係於如下方面較佳:實體影像顯示齒之背面側,容易與自齒之正面另外攝影之影像對照,並且可於相同之部位同時取得實體影像與X光影像,因此不用實施尋求一致範圍之影像處理,而可容易地獲得。The combination of the combined mirror B9112 and the X-ray sensor B9113 is preferably as follows: the solid image shows the back side of the tooth, which is easy to contrast with the image taken from the front of the tooth, and can simultaneously acquire the solid image in the same part. With X-ray images, it is not easy to obtain image processing that seeks a consistent range.

口腔內之X光影像係對於患者而言難解之影像,藉由將相同之攝影部位之實體影像並置或穿透性地重疊於電腦螢幕、紙面等而進行顯示,更容易理解X光影像,對患者之說明變得容易。X-ray images in the oral cavity are difficult to understand for patients. It is easier to understand X-ray images by displaying the physical images of the same photographic part in parallel or penetratingly on the computer screen, paper surface, etc. The description of the patient becomes easy.

關於X光影像,於牙科X光之情形時,利用1次攝影將數個齒攝影為一張或一資料。於該情形時,一面移動X光感測器與X光輸出裝置,一面進行例如連攝攝影,對全顎進行複數之X光影像化後,作為數位資料,進行輪廓抽取。而且,亦可檢測各個鄰接之X光影像中畸變較少之影像之共通部分並利用區塊匹配法或使其等重疊,檢測一致、推斷一致之點,而形成全景之影像。進而,實體影像亦同樣地形成全景之影像。藉由將該等影像印刷於螢幕畫面或用紙上,可形成可進行容易理解之比較之資料。Regarding the X-ray image, in the case of dental X-ray, several teeth are photographed as one piece or one piece of information by one shot. In this case, while moving the X-ray sensor and the X-ray output device, for example, continuous shooting is performed, and a plurality of X-rays are imaged for the entire cymbal, and then contour extraction is performed as digital data. Moreover, it is also possible to detect a common portion of the image with less distortion in each adjacent X-ray image and to use a block matching method or to overlap them to detect a coincident and inferred point to form a panoramic image. Furthermore, the solid image also forms a panoramic image. By printing the images on a screen or on paper, it is possible to form a data that can be easily understood.

將一例示於圖23(d)(e)。圖23(d)表示對實體影像資料進行數位處理而接合之狀態,b104係上顎資料,b105係下顎資料。利用例如圖1所示之口腔內攝影機,一面逐漸地移動位置一面例如連攝地攝影上顎資料(b104),一面重疊並接合各影像之共通部分而製成。下顎資料(b105)亦同樣地製成,表示製成一張影像之方法,亦可同時攝影上顎下顎,一面重疊共通部分一面進行接合。連攝係顯示為影像之構成連續,且尺寸上亦連續,故有容易看到連接之部位,且尺寸調整亦較少之情形。An example will be shown in Fig. 23 (d) (e). Fig. 23(d) shows the state in which the physical image data is digitally processed and joined, b104 is the upper data, and b105 is the lower data. For example, the intra-oral camera shown in Fig. 1 is used to gradually move the position, for example, to photograph the upper information (b104), and to overlap and join the common portions of the respective images. The squatting data (b105) is also made in the same manner, and means that the image is made into one image, and the squatting squat is simultaneously photographed, and the common portion is overlapped while being joined. The continuous camera system shows that the image is continuous in composition and continuous in size, so that it is easy to see the connected portion and the size adjustment is also small.

於獲得如上所述之全景之實體影像之情形時,亦可使用中間亮度值法、區塊匹配法、光流法等方法。In the case of obtaining a panoramic solid image as described above, an intermediate luminance value method, a block matching method, an optical flow method, or the like can also be used.

圖23(e)表示同樣地接合X光影像而製成之上顎X光資料b106與下顎X光資料b107,進而,在於下顎中,重疊實體影像之下顎資料b105之狀態下,患者亦容易觀察。Fig. 23(e) shows that the X-ray image b106 and the lower X-ray data b107 are joined in the same manner, and further, in the state where the data b105 is superimposed under the solid image, the patient can easily observe it.

本實施例係為了能比較口腔內實體影像、X光影像Y、虛擬矯正全景齒列影像、利用虛擬配色之全景齒列影像等,藉由對電腦螢幕、用紙之印宇、印刷,使患者「可視化」患者之口腔內,藉此可促進繼續之治療、有效之預防、積極之治療之自費率之提高等。In this embodiment, in order to compare the physical image of the oral cavity, the X-ray image Y, the virtual corrected panoramic dentition image, the panoramic dentition image using the virtual color matching, etc., the patient is made "on the computer screen, the printing of the paper, and the printing". Visualize the patient's mouth, thereby promoting continued treatment, effective prevention, and increased self-pay for active treatment.

又,利用X光、實體影像顯示齒齦、顎骨中需要補充之部位,作為人造牙根之植立條件之顎骨之狀態或實體影像中之虛擬彌補之狀態之合成等可根據X光影像而進行,亦可顯示利用骨再生手段之再生區域。In addition, X-rays and solid images are used to display the parts of the gums and the tibia that need to be replenished, and the state of the tibia as the condition for artificial root formation or the state of the virtual remedy in the physical image can be performed according to the X-ray image. A regeneration area utilizing bone regeneration means can be displayed.

實體影像、X光影像及顯微鏡影像係作為多方面之影像清單,可容易觀察地進行彙總,因此藉由影像顯示、輸出上述編輯之結果,可使患者容易理解地表示根據口腔內狀況之治療及預防之順序。The physical image, the X-ray image, and the microscope image are collected as a multi-faceted image, and can be easily observed. Therefore, by displaying the image and outputting the result of the editing, the patient can easily understand the treatment according to the condition of the oral cavity. The order of prevention.

實體影像之攝影係例如進行夾竹桃紅等牙垢著色而可目視觀察牙垢附著狀況後,形成圖23(d)所示之影像並記錄於記錄裝置中,而可觀察牙垢之附著狀況與齒齦之狀況。進而,根據齒齦之狀況採取牙垢,使用顯微鏡形成牙周病菌影像,於與採取部位相關之狀況下,進行影像編輯。The photographing of the solid image is performed by, for example, coloring tartar such as oleander red, and visually observing the tartar adhesion state, and then forming an image shown in FIG. 23(d) and recording it in a recording apparatus, and observing the adhesion state of the tartar and the condition of the gums. Further, tartar was taken according to the condition of the gums, and a periodontal disease image was formed using a microscope, and image editing was performed in a state related to the site to be taken.

進而,可將利用與X光影像之併用,以5階段之程度容易觀察地顯示牙周病之狀況之口腔內地圖作為影像資料、印字資料而形成,合格地進行牙周病預防、蛀牙預防。Further, an intraoral map in which the condition of the periodontal disease is displayed in an easy-to-observe manner in a five-stage manner can be used as the image data and the printed material, and the periodontal disease prevention and the tooth decay prevention can be performed satisfactorily.

藉由取得利用上述全景規格之全齒或一部分齒之相片影像之實體影像形成手段,獲得使用紅色之染色劑而顯示有牙垢之影像資料。Image data showing tartar using a red coloring agent is obtained by obtaining a solid image forming means using the photographic image of the full or partial tooth of the above-mentioned panoramic specification.

藉由使用利用軟體之例如亮度值檢測方法檢測該影像資料之紅色之濃淡程度之檢測手段,檢測濃淡值。The gradation value is detected by detecting a degree of fading of the redness of the image data by, for example, a luminance value detecting method using a software.

藉由設置該濃淡值中之固定值、例如根據儲存至牙周病菌容易繁殖之程度之狀態下的厚度之濃度值超過以亮度值換算之值的情形時,對影像資料之上述部位附加注意標記(合成於畫面上之記號等)之手段,當利用電腦螢幕或印表機輸出口腔內染色後之影像時,可自動地顯示牙垢之附著量較多之部分。By setting a fixed value in the shading value, for example, a value in which the thickness of the thickness in the state in which the periodontal bacteria are easily propagated exceeds the value converted in the luminance value, the attention mark is attached to the above portion of the image data. The means for synthesizing the marks on the screen, etc., when the image printed in the oral cavity is output by a computer screen or a printer, the portion where the amount of tartar adhered is automatically displayed.

可自影像觀察該輸出顯示與齒齦之狀況,從而可高效率地進行牙周病之發現、預防、治療。The output display and the condition of the gums can be observed from the image, so that the detection, prevention, and treatment of periodontal disease can be performed efficiently.

口腔內之虛擬之彌補治療顯示Virtual make-up treatment display in the mouth

本發明係藉由X光影像與實體影像之並設合成可形成容易理解之影像,進而,將彌補物之虛擬形狀或顏色資訊重疊於該影像並進行合成,可容易理解地顯示治療後之虛擬狀態。The invention combines the X-ray image and the solid image to form an easy-to-understand image, and then superimposes the virtual shape or color information of the make-up on the image and synthesizes the image, and can display the virtual after treatment easily. status.

作為一例,表示如下之構成:對圖21(a)所示之X光影像攝影手段B8011於後端附加用以合成顯示圖21(b)所示之虛擬形狀之手段,對圖21(a)所示之實體影像攝影手段B8012於後段附加合成顯示圖21(c)所示之虛擬形狀之手段。As an example, a configuration is shown in which a means for synthesizing the virtual shape shown in FIG. 21(b) is added to the rear end of the X-ray image capturing means B8011 shown in FIG. 21(a), and FIG. 21(a) is shown. The physical image capturing means B8012 shown is a means for synthesizing the virtual shape shown in Fig. 21(c) in the latter stage.

進而,較佳為具備預先儲存虛擬形狀,於虛擬合成顯示時,調出而進行使用之虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022。Further, it is preferable to include a storage means B8022 such as a virtual shape that is stored in advance and stored in a virtual shape for use in virtual composite display.

作為虛擬形狀等,於義齒、牙橋、卡環、非卡環、植入物、嵌體、牙冠、其他彌補物、矯正用器具形狀資訊且虛擬形狀中亦包含顏色資訊,亦可包含例如預先或於使用時將由決定色調時所使用之多數之具有齒形狀之顏色樣本所構成之比色板資料化並進行儲存所得者、儲存全齒或一個齒之顏色資訊等所得者。As a virtual shape or the like, the denture, the bridge, the snap ring, the implant, the inlay, the crown, the other make-up, the corrective device shape information, and the virtual shape also include color information, and may also include, for example, A colorimetric plate composed of a plurality of color samples having a tooth shape used for determining the color tone is used in advance or stored, and the obtained color information of all teeth or one tooth is obtained.

該資料之儲存係於攝影患者之口腔內之X光影像、實體影像時,亦可視需要對上述影像附加修正、整理用資料等而依序儲存。The storage of the data is stored in the X-ray image or the physical image of the oral cavity of the patient, and may be sequentially stored in the image by adding correction, sorting data, etc. as needed.

於圖21(b)中,B8018係X光影像用之虛擬形狀調整手段,於所攝影之X光影像攝影手段B8011中,對於所攝影之X光攝影影像,可依據其尺寸而於X光影像上容易辨別自虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022中由使用者指定或自動調出之虛擬形狀,並且調整為可調整為無不適感之色彩並進行合成之狀態。B8019係對於X光影像之合成顯示手段,為合成X光影像與虛擬形狀並顯示於螢幕畫面上之手段。In Fig. 21(b), the B8018 is a virtual shape adjustment means for X-ray images. In the X-ray image capturing means B8011 to be photographed, the X-ray image to be captured can be X-ray image according to its size. It is easy to distinguish the virtual shape specified or automatically recalled by the user from the storage means B8022 such as the virtual shape, and is adjusted to a state in which the color can be adjusted to be uncomfortable and synthesized. B8019 is a means for synthesizing X-ray images, which is a means for synthesizing X-ray images and virtual shapes and displaying them on a screen.

圖21(b)及(c)係分別追加虛擬合成顯示手段作為附隨於攝影手段者,並不限定於附隨者,亦可根據目的,而設定為主構成。又,無需圖21之進行實體影像、X光影像之重疊之構成,實體影像、X光影像亦可分別單獨地進行虛擬顯示之合成。該合成係將影像設為BMP、JPEG、GIF等通用之形式,亦可與網格顯示等同樣地使用疊印方法,或使用通用之繪圖軟體中所使用之穿透方法或重疊方法。In FIGS. 21(b) and 21(c), the virtual composite display means is added as a means of attaching to the photographing means, and is not limited to the accompanying person, and may be set as a main configuration depending on the purpose. Moreover, the configuration in which the physical image and the X-ray image are superimposed is not required in FIG. 21, and the physical image and the X-ray image may be separately combined for virtual display. The composition is a common form of BMP, JPEG, GIF, etc., and the overprint method can be used in the same manner as the grid display or the penetration method or the overlapping method used in the general drawing software.

於圖21(c)中,B8020係實體影像用之虛擬形狀調整手段,具有與X光影像用之虛擬形狀調整手段相同之構成。B8021係合成顯示手段,其亦具有與X光影像用之合成顯示手段相同之功能、構成。In Fig. 21(c), the B8020 is a virtual shape adjustment means for solid image, and has the same configuration as the virtual shape adjustment means for X-ray images. The B8021 is a composite display means, and has the same function and configuration as the synthetic display means for X-ray images.

參照圖28對圖21所示之虛擬顯示之合成構成進行詳細說明。The composite configuration of the virtual display shown in Fig. 21 will be described in detail with reference to Fig. 28 .

於圖21(a)中,利用X光影像攝影手段B8011,攝影並形成圖28(a)所示之全齒X光影像b201。其係自例如既成之X光全景攝影裝置所獲得之全景影像、或針對每數個對全齒進行X光攝影而取得影像,將其轉換成數位影像後,對各個影像進行例如輪廓抽取後,檢測共通部。In Fig. 21(a), the X-ray image capturing means B8011 is used to image and form the full-tooth X-ray image b201 shown in Fig. 28(a). The image is obtained from, for example, a panoramic image obtained by a conventional X-ray panoramic imaging device, or an X-ray image is acquired for each of the plurality of full teeth, and converted into a digital image, and then, for example, contour is extracted for each image. Detect the common department.

亦可針對每一影像於共通部進行連接而形成全齒之全景影像。同樣地,利用實體影像攝影手段B8012形成圖28(b)所示之全齒之全景之實體影像b202。再者,該全齒影像並不限定於該方法,亦可使用進行連攝攝影,選出適當之影像進行接合之方法等。It is also possible to form a panoramic image of the full tooth by connecting each image to the common portion. Similarly, the entity image b202 of the full-teeth panorama shown in FIG. 28(b) is formed by the physical image capturing means B8012. Furthermore, the full-tooth image is not limited to this method, and a method of performing continuous shooting, selecting an appropriate image for bonding, or the like may be used.

自影像中找出治療部位。例如於影像b201中為臼齒缺損部b219a與b219b、前齒之缺損部b219c及前齒之間隙b219d,實體影像b202亦相同。Find the treatment site from the image. For example, in the image b201, the caries defect portions b219a and b219b, the front tooth defect portion b219c, and the front tooth gap b219d are also the same as the entity image b202.

分別研究缺損部需要怎樣之彌補,例如若為前齒彌補物,則利用虛擬形狀調整手段B8018檢索虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022選擇可彌補之形狀之前齒之候補。進行選擇後,讀出選擇影像,一面於畫面上選擇尺寸與顏色一面利用合成顯示手段B8019進行合成而顯示於顯示螢幕。圖28(c)係例如合成虛擬構成而得之影像b203。在合成影像b203中,對下顎之臼齒缺損部b219a與b219b適當確認人造牙根之情形時,當自虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022,遍及複數個人造牙根b213、上部構造b215時,選擇牙橋用之植入物b212及牙橋上部構造b214,利用虛擬形狀調整手段B8018調整尺寸、顏色,利用合成顯示手段B8019進行合成,並顯示於螢幕畫面、移動終端機之螢幕畫面。It is necessary to separately study how the defect needs to be compensated. For example, if it is a front tooth compensation, the virtual shape adjustment means B8018 is used to search for a virtual shape or the like storage means B8022 to select a candidate for the shape before the tooth can be compensated. After the selection is made, the selected image is read, and the size and color are selected on the screen, and combined by the composite display means B8019 to be displayed on the display screen. Fig. 28(c) shows, for example, a video b203 obtained by synthesizing a virtual composition. In the synthetic image b203, when the artificial tooth root is appropriately confirmed for the dentition defect portions b219a and b219b of the lower jaw, when the plurality of individual tooth roots b213 and the upper structure b215 are spread from the storage means B8022 such as the virtual shape, the plant for the bridge is selected. The input b212 and the bridge upper structure b214 are adjusted in size and color by the virtual shape adjustment means B8018, and combined by the composite display means B8019, and displayed on the screen screen or the screen of the mobile terminal.

對於利用實體影像攝影手段所獲得之實體影像資料b202亦同樣地自虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022中調出實體影像用之彌補齒、嵌體資料等,利用虛擬形狀調整手段B8020,調整尺寸、顏色,利用合成顯示手段B8021進行顯示。Similarly, the physical image data b202 obtained by the physical image capturing means is used to call up the complementary teeth, inlay data, and the like for the solid image from the storage means B8022 such as the virtual shape, and the size and color are adjusted by the virtual shape adjusting means B8020. Display is performed by the composite display means B8021.

b216表示圖28(c)之牙橋用上部構造b214,b219表示圖28(c)之上部構造b215。b217係前齒用之牙冠,相當於圖28(c)之b210。b218表示圖28(c)之間隙彌補部b211。B216 denotes the bridge upper structure b214 of Fig. 28(c), and b219 denotes the upper structure b215 of Fig. 28(c). B217 is a crown for the front teeth, which is equivalent to b210 of Figure 28(c). B218 denotes the gap compensation portion b211 of Fig. 28(c).

間隙彌補部b211之形成係例如若相互之齒為牙冠,則亦可藉由增大牙冠之大小而將兩牙冠設為接觸狀態而形成。於天然牙之情形時,表示略微削去雙方之齒,而進行彌補之方法。For example, if the teeth of the gap compensation portion b211 are crowns, the crowns can be formed in a contact state by increasing the size of the crown. In the case of natural teeth, it means that the teeth of both sides are slightly cut off, and the method of making up is made.

對合成之影像b203、b204之各個以斜線表示彌補物。例如,於在合成之影像b203中之牙橋用植入物b212、及牙橋用上部構造b214中,強度等不佳之情形時,自虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022中讀出與下顎右側相同之3個人造牙根與上部構造,並替換地顯示,一面觀察影像一面調整缺損部之骨之狀況、可植入之範圍。The complements are indicated by diagonal lines for each of the synthesized images b203 and b204. For example, in the case of the bridge implant b212 and the bridge upper structure b214 in the synthesized image b203, when the strength is not good, the same as the right side of the lower jaw is read from the storage means B8022 such as the virtual shape. The individual root and the upper structure are displayed alternately, and the condition of the bone of the defect portion and the implantable range are adjusted while observing the image.

又,亦可自虛擬形狀等儲存手段,調出齒色資料,於螢幕比較調整與鄰接齒之顏色之關係,而決定。Moreover, the tooth color data can be called up from a storage means such as a virtual shape, and the relationship between the screen and the color of the adjacent teeth can be adjusted and determined.

例如,前齒彌補b210亦可一面對照通用之模型,一面與鄰接齒調整形狀、顏色並進行合成而決定。For example, the front tooth compensation b210 can also be determined by adjusting the shape and color and synthesizing the adjacent teeth with respect to the common model.

間隙b219d之治療方法亦可自虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022,選擇嵌體、牙冠等可使用之彌補樣式,嵌入影像中,並且利用虛擬形狀調整手段B8018進行調整,一面觀察利用合成顯示手段B8019合成之情況,一面研究其他虛擬形狀。於該虛擬形狀形成為三維之情形時,於畫面上,使虛擬形狀旋轉,即便為平面口腔內影像,亦可獲得更真實之合成影像。The treatment method of the gap b219d can also be used from the storage means B8022 such as the virtual shape, and the inlay, crown, and the like can be used to make up the pattern, embedded in the image, and adjusted by the virtual shape adjustment means B8018, and synthesized by the synthetic display means B8019. In the case, while studying other virtual shapes. When the virtual shape is formed into a three-dimensional shape, the virtual shape is rotated on the screen, and even if it is a flat intra-oral image, a more realistic synthetic image can be obtained.

即便在獲得圖28(c)與(d)之影像之狀態之前,對於研究而言亦為充足之資訊,進而,利用圖21(a)之比較部位檢測手段B8013,自圖28(c)所示之合成影像,指定合成前之部位中之成為特徵之部位,利用比較部位抽取手段B8014,自圖28(d)所示之影像,指定合成前之部位中之成為特徵之部位,利用比較手段B8015,對照兩者之比較部位,暫時記錄一致之狀態,進而顯示。Even before the state of the images of FIGS. 28(c) and (d) is obtained, sufficient information is available for the study, and further, the comparative portion detecting means B8013 of FIG. 21(a) is used, from FIG. 28(c). The synthetic image shown in the figure specifies the part which is the feature in the part before the synthesis, and the comparative part extracting means B8014 is used to specify the part which becomes the feature in the part before the synthesis from the image shown in Fig. 28 (d), and the comparison means is used. B8015, in contrast to the comparison of the two, temporarily record the same state, and then display.

將表示該顯示之狀態之影像示於圖28(e)。合成影像b205係重疊實體影像與X光影像所得者。編號係影像b203、b204所示之彌補狀態。難以識別X光影像,尤其難以識別齒齦部位,藉由如上所述之合成影像,容易明白地顯示X光影像之齒齦部,而且,可容易明白地顯示上部構造或齒與牙根部之平衡。An image showing the state of the display is shown in Fig. 28(e). The composite image b205 is obtained by superimposing a solid image and an X-ray image. The numbers are the compensated states shown by images b203 and b204. It is difficult to recognize an X-ray image, and it is particularly difficult to recognize the gum portion. The synthetic image of the above-described image can easily and clearly display the gum portion of the X-ray image, and the balance of the upper structure or the tooth and the root can be easily and clearly displayed.

藉由於畫面上進行虛擬之裝著,可進行患者可想像實際之治療結果之口腔內之顯示,又,欲藉由適於本人之著色或銀齒、陶瓷等齒之虛擬陳列謀求更適合患者之彌補。於治療時,對於X光影像之虛擬之裝著係對於牙科醫師而言,亦對治療形成參考。虛擬資料直接使用既成之市售之資料,進行放大縮小並合成,除上述情形以外,可於合成後,根據實際之距離,轉換成彌補資料,亦一併獲得顏色資訊及增白、矯正資料。By the virtual installation on the screen, it is possible to display the oral cavity in which the patient can imagine the actual treatment result, and to be more suitable for the patient by a virtual display suitable for the color of the person or the teeth such as silver teeth and ceramics. make up. For the treatment, the virtual attachment of the X-ray image is also a reference for the treatment of the dentist. The virtual data is directly enlarged, reduced and synthesized using the commercially available materials. In addition to the above, after the synthesis, the data can be converted into make-up data according to the actual distance, and color information and whitening and correction data are also obtained.

可藉由對於彌補部位之虛擬形狀之合成,而求出實際之彌補物之尺寸之一部分,因此亦有虛擬形狀等資料直接用作彌補物製造用之資料之情形。It is possible to obtain a part of the size of the actual make-up by synthesizing the virtual shape of the compensation portion. Therefore, there is also a case where the virtual shape or the like is directly used as the material for manufacturing the make-up.

亦有如下之情形:藉由電腦進行該方法,藉此迅速地知道實際之彌補物之大小之一部分,且亦可直接作為彌補物之製造資料而進行使用。There are also cases in which the method is carried out by a computer to quickly know a part of the size of the actual make-up, and it can also be used directly as a manufacturing material of the make-up.

移動終端機型資訊輸入輸出手段Mobile terminal type information input and output means

以下,參照圖24詳細說明本發明之實施例。Hereinafter, an embodiment of the present invention will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

1a01係小型電池且例示按鈕型、圓筒型、薄片型、針型等電池,又,一次電池、二次電池均可使用。1a01 is a small battery and is exemplified by a button type, a cylinder type, a sheet type, a needle type, and the like, and a primary battery or a secondary battery can be used.

1a02係升壓手段,為DC-DC轉換器、斬波器型、其他交換調節器,使用具有將例如1.5 V升壓至3 V左右之功能者。The 1a02 boosting means is a DC-DC converter, a chopper type, and other switching regulators, and has a function of boosting, for example, 1.5 V to about 3 V.

1a03係控制手段,例示單晶片型之電腦、ASIC(Application Specific Integrated Circuit,特殊應用積體電路)等控制晶片。1a03 is a control device, and is a control wafer such as a single-chip type computer or an ASIC (Application Specific Integrated Circuit).

1a04係顯示手段,例示由液晶面板等形成之可進行二維顯示者。1a04 is a display means, and is exemplified by a liquid crystal panel or the like which can perform two-dimensional display.

1a05係通訊手段,根據無線媒體1a0C之類型,適當調整,若為電波,則使用包含直至數GHz為止之載波輸出手段、FM、AM、PCM等調變手段、收發天線等之電路,若為光,則使用LED、雷射與CDS等受光元件之組合,其中,亦可較佳地利用使用電波之Zigbee模組(商品名)等。除此以外,亦有亦可為USB連接等通用纜線、專用纜線等利用有線之通訊手段之情形。1a05 is a communication means, which is appropriately adjusted according to the type of the wireless medium 1a0C. If it is a radio wave, a carrier output means including up to several GHz, a modulation means such as FM, AM, and PCM, and a transmitting/receiving antenna are used. Further, a combination of a light-receiving element such as an LED, a laser, and a CDS is used. Among them, a Zigbee module (trade name) using a radio wave or the like can be preferably used. In addition, it is also possible to use a wired communication means such as a universal cable such as a USB connection or a dedicated cable.

1a06係輸入手段,例示小鍵盤、觸控板,除此以外進行按壓、觸碰等,將作為使用者之目的之部位轉換為電信號者。亦有使用具有觸控面板功能之液晶面板等顯示手段1a04與輸入手段1a06被相同之裝置兼用之情形。1a06 is an input means, which exemplifies a keypad and a touch panel, and performs pressing, touching, and the like, and converts a part that is a user's purpose into an electric signal. There is also a case where the display means 1a04 such as a liquid crystal panel having a touch panel function and the input means 1a06 are used in the same manner.

1a07係儲存手段,為了向顯示部編輯患者資料並進行顯示而記錄程式。患者資料主要於主裝置側記錄,因此亦可為暫時之儲存,根據容量進行儲存即可。1a08係直接連接輸入手段1a06與終端機側通訊手段1a05之電性線路,其係表示若按下鍵,則直接經由終端機側通訊手段1a05,進行傳送之功能者,亦可表示與鍵盤與電腦之間之電路線路相同之構成。亦有當控制手段1a03代行時不需要之情形。1a07 is a storage means for recording a program in order to edit and display the patient data to the display unit. The patient data is mainly recorded on the main device side, so it can also be temporarily stored and stored according to the capacity. 1a08 is a direct connection between the input means 1a06 and the terminal side communication means 1a05, which means that if the key is pressed, the function is directly transmitted via the terminal side communication means 1a05, and the keyboard and the computer can also be represented. The circuit between the circuits is the same. There is also a case where it is not necessary when the control means 1a03 is substituted.

1a0B係主裝置,表示儲存有患者資料、患者口腔內資料、患者健康資料、考勤等牙科從事者相關資料、牙科診療資料、經電子化之病歷資料、患者預約資料等之資料庫等儲存牙科醫業相關之所有資料之記錄手段1a11、主電腦1a10及通訊手段1a09之組合構成。1a0B is a main device, which stores stored data such as patient data, patient oral data, patient health data, attendance related information such as dental attendance, dental medical information, electronic medical record data, patient reservation data, etc. The recording means 1a11, the main computer 1a10, and the communication means 1a09 of all the materials related to the industry are combined.

1a09係主機側之通訊手段,為表示與移動終端機側之終端機側通訊手段1a05成為一對之構成者。由於對複數個患者利用複數之移動終端機不佳,故移動終端機或通訊手段1a09較佳為可設定多重通道,且僅受理來自既定之移動終端機之輸入。1a09 is a communication means on the host side, and is a combination of the terminal side communication means 1a05 on the mobile terminal side. Since a plurality of mobile terminals are not suitable for a plurality of patients, the mobile terminal or communication means 1a09 preferably sets a plurality of channels and accepts only input from a predetermined mobile terminal.

1a10係主電腦,表示與顯示用顯示器裝置、鍵盤、滑鼠、印表機等周邊機器之組合構成。1a10 is a main computer and is combined with a peripheral device such as a display device, a keyboard, a mouse, and a printer.

1a11係記錄手段,為硬碟、SD(Secure Digital,安全數位卡)、DVD(Digital Video Disc,數位視訊光碟)、USB記憶體等記錄媒體,亦可收容於上述主電腦1a10內。The 1a11 recording means is a recording medium such as a hard disk, an SD (Secure Digital) card, a DVD (Digital Video Disc), a USB memory, or the like, and can be stored in the host computer 1a10.

通訊手段1a09除亦同樣地外部連接之情形以外,有時亦可內置。The communication means 1a09 may be built in addition to the case of external connection.

1a12係通訊網路,例示網際網路、公司內部LAN(Local Area Network,區域網路)、內部網路等。1a12 is a communication network, which exemplifies the Internet, the company's internal LAN (Local Area Network), and the internal network.

1a13係其他主裝置,具有與主裝置1a0B之主電腦1a10相同之構成,亦可儲存主裝置1a0B未擁有之患者資料等。1a13 is another main device having the same configuration as the main computer 1a10 of the main device 1a0B, and can store patient data not owned by the main device 1a0B.

又,藉由自例如遠程向移動終端機發送治療資料,亦可支援進行操作之牙科醫師之檢查治療。Further, by transmitting the treatment data to the mobile terminal from, for example, remotely, it is also possible to support the examination and treatment of the dentist who performs the operation.

繼而,對圖24之動作進行說明。Next, the operation of FIG. 24 will be described.

利用升壓手段1a02使電池1a01之電壓上升,並供給至各手段。藉由該升壓手段1a02,將例如電池電壓1.5 V上升至3 V或其以上之電壓,藉此C-MOS控制元件等可進行驅動。The voltage of the battery 1a01 is raised by the boosting means 1a02 and supplied to each means. By the boosting means 1a02, for example, a battery voltage of 1.5 V is raised to a voltage of 3 V or more, whereby the C-MOS control element or the like can be driven.

控制手段1a03亦可自儲存手段1a07中調出牙科診療時之檢查資料處理用程式並進行執行而顯示於顯示手段1a04。The control means 1a03 can also display the inspection data processing program for the dental treatment from the storage means 1a07 and execute it on the display means 1a04.

或者,亦可直接於顯示手段1a04上顯示自主電腦1a10所傳送之資料。Alternatively, the data transmitted by the home computer 1a10 may be displayed directly on the display means 1a04.

由於使用無線通訊手段,故可於最初或操作中途,檢查通訊狀態,並確認通訊狀況。再者,亦有亦可設為即便於中途切斷無線連接,亦可藉由控制手段1a03,而暫時進行切斷期間之輸入輸出之構成之情形。Since the wireless communication means is used, the communication status can be checked at the beginning or in the middle of the operation, and the communication status can be confirmed. In addition, it is also possible to temporarily change the configuration of the input/output during the cutting period by the control means 1a03 even if the wireless connection is cut off in the middle.

依據顯示手段1a04之顯示,操作者按下、觸碰輸入手段1a06之輸入按鈕等而進行操作。According to the display of the display means 1a04, the operator operates by pressing or touching the input button of the input means 1a06.

於該情形時,若按下例如輸入手段1a06之「1」之鍵,則經由控制手段1a03將「1」輸出顯示於顯示手段1a04,並且經由終端機側通訊手段1a05、無線媒體1a0C、通訊手段1a09,向主電腦1a10傳送。於若執行按鈕信號到達主電腦1a10,則將例如患者名自輸入手段1a06傳送至主電腦1a10之情形時,於接收之主電腦1a10內之資料庫進行檢索,並將資料向移動終端機1a0A傳送。所傳送之資料經由終端機側通訊手段1a05由控制手段1a03調整為顯示用,並顯示於顯示手段1a04。In this case, when the "1" key of the input means 1a06 is pressed, the "1" output is displayed on the display means 1a04 via the control means 1a03, and the terminal side communication means 1a05, the wireless medium 1a0C, and the communication means are transmitted. 1a09, transmitted to the host computer 1a10. When the execution button signal reaches the host computer 1a10, for example, when the patient name is transmitted from the input means 1a06 to the host computer 1a10, the database in the host computer 1a10 is retrieved and the data is transmitted to the mobile terminal 1a0A. . The transmitted data is adjusted to be displayed by the control means 1a03 via the terminal side communication means 1a05, and displayed on the display means 1a04.

又,亦可為自主電腦1a10傳送至移動終端機之資料直接顯示於移動終端機1a0A之顯示手段1a04之構成,又,控制手段1a03亦可自儲存手段1a07調出程式並執行,對自上述主電腦1a10所傳送之資料進行程式處理,而顯示於顯示手段1a04中。Moreover, the data transmitted to the mobile terminal by the autonomous computer 1a10 can be directly displayed on the display means 1a04 of the mobile terminal 1a0A. Further, the control means 1a03 can also call up and execute the program from the storage means 1a07. The data transmitted by the computer 1a10 is processed by the program and displayed on the display means 1a04.

由無線通訊手段收發之資料係傳送符號資料、數值資料、記號資料、其他文本資料、影像資料。The data transmitted and received by wireless communication means transmitting symbol data, numerical data, symbol data, other text data, and video data.

於主電腦1a10中不存在所需之內容之情形時,有時亦對其他主裝置1a13經由通訊網路1a12謀求資料之獲得。When there is no required content in the host computer 1a10, the other host devices 1a13 may also obtain data via the communication network 1a12.

來自輸入手段1a06之輸入進而記錄於主裝置側之記錄手段1a11。The input from the input means 1a06 is further recorded on the recording means 1a11 on the master side.

於例如獲得牙周袋深度值而自輸入手段1a06手動地輸入之情形時,直接經由主電腦1a10記錄於記錄手段1a11中,為了確認所輸入之值,亦可設置用以亦於顯示手段1a04進行上述顯示之電路。For example, when the periodontal pocket depth value is obtained and manually input from the input means 1a06, it is directly recorded in the recording means 1a11 via the host computer 1a10. In order to confirm the input value, it can also be set to be also performed by the display means 1a04. The circuit shown above.

繼而,參照圖24、圖25進一步詳細說明本發明之實施例之動作。Next, the operation of the embodiment of the present invention will be described in further detail with reference to Figs. 24 and 25 .

於使用開始時,如圖25所示之步驟1b01所示般執行自動通訊測試,若通訊測試失敗(no)(圖25所示之步驟1b02),則顯示錯誤訊息(圖25所示之步驟1b03),再次於圖25所示之步驟1b01中進行自動通訊測試。At the beginning of use, the automatic communication test is performed as shown in step 1b01 shown in FIG. 25. If the communication test fails (no) (step 1b02 shown in FIG. 25), an error message is displayed (step 1b03 shown in FIG. 25). ), the automatic communication test is performed again in step 1b01 shown in FIG.

若自動通訊測試成功(yes),則圖24所示之主電腦1a10經由通訊手段1a09、無線媒體1a0C、終端機側通訊手段1a05將患者‧選擇項目單顯示資料輸出至控制手段1a03,輸入該資料輸入之控制手段1a03將其輸出至顯示手段1a04。於該情形時,主電腦1a10所輸出者為顯示用資料,例示於利用顯示手段1a04顯示該顯示用資料之情形時,控制手段1a03執行自儲存手段1a07所讀出之顯示用程式而形成之情況。If the automatic communication test is successful (yes), the host computer 1a10 shown in FIG. 24 outputs the patient ‧ selection item list display data to the control means 1a03 via the communication means 1a09, the wireless medium 1a0C, and the terminal side communication means 1a05, and inputs the data. The input control means 1a03 outputs it to the display means 1a04. In this case, the output of the host computer 1a10 is the display material, and when the display data is displayed by the display means 1a04, the control means 1a03 executes the display program read from the storage means 1a07. .

再者,患者‧選擇項目單亦可作為程式記錄於移動終端機之儲存手段1a07中。Furthermore, the patient ‧ selection item list can also be recorded as a program in the storage means 1a07 of the mobile terminal.

又,亦有不經由控制手段1a03,而直接將資料顯示於顯示手段1a04之情形。Further, there is a case where the data is directly displayed on the display means 1a04 without passing through the control means 1a03.

圖24所示之顯示手段1a04進行患者‧使用者選擇項目單之顯示(圖25所示之步驟1b04)。The display means 1a04 shown in Fig. 24 displays the patient ‧ user selection item list (step 1b04 shown in Fig. 25).

對在圖25所示之步驟1b05中,按下小鍵盤輸入患者選擇項目單編號之情形(yes)進行說明,其他選擇(no)係向端子1b05a移動而進行,由於成為相同操作之重複故省略圖示及說明。In the case of step 1b05 shown in FIG. 25, when the keypad is pressed to input the patient selection item number (yes), the other selection (no) is performed by moving to the terminal 1b05a, and is omitted because it is repeated for the same operation. Illustration and description.

若進行患者選擇(例如按下小鍵盤之1),則1之信號直接經由無線通訊手段而傳送至主電腦1a10,並且將患者名輸入框顯示於顯示手段1a04之程式作動。若於圖25所示之步驟1b06中,按下小鍵盤而輸入患者名或患者編碼,則每進行按壓時將與所按下之小鍵盤對應之記號、文字資料傳送至主電腦1a10,若按下輸入鍵,則對主電腦1a10之記錄手段1a11內之儲存資料進行檢索。If patient selection is made (for example, by pressing the keypad 1), the signal of 1 is directly transmitted to the host computer 1a10 via the wireless communication means, and the patient name input box is displayed on the display means 1a04. If the patient name or the patient code is input by pressing the keypad in step 1b06 shown in FIG. 25, the mark and text data corresponding to the pressed keypad are transmitted to the host computer 1a10 every time the press is performed, and if The lower input key searches for the stored data in the recording means 1a11 of the host computer 1a10.

該檢索除姓名全部一致檢索以外,可利用僅輸入姓或名而進行檢索之部分一致檢索等,顯示於部分一致檢索之情形時所獲得之患者清單。In addition to the search for all the names, the search can be performed by using a partial search or the like that searches only by inputting the last name or the name, and displays the list of patients obtained when the partial search is performed.

形成是否存在患者候補之選擇顯示,於存在之情形時,按下表示存在之情形之鍵,將上述按下之資訊直接傳送至主電腦1a10,主電腦1a10自資料庫調出患者資料,並向移動終端機1a0A傳送。Forming whether there is a selection display of the patient candidate, and in the case of the presence, pressing the button indicating the presence condition, directly transmitting the information pressed to the host computer 1a10, the host computer 1a10 recalls the patient data from the database, and The mobile terminal 1a0A transmits.

該患者資料係顯示於顯示手段1a04,於該情形時,控制手段1a03亦可直接針對每一換行編碼而列舉顯示。The patient data is displayed on the display means 1a04. In this case, the control means 1a03 can also directly display the display for each line feed code.

進而,於患者資料顯示之情形時,控制手段1a03亦可自儲存手段1a07讀出並執行顯示用程式,於顯示手段1a04形成具有依據程式之排列之顯示。Further, in the case where the patient data is displayed, the control means 1a03 can also read out and execute the display program from the storage means 1a07, and display the display means 1a04 with the arrangement according to the program.

於在圖25所示之步驟1b07中存在患者候補之情形(yes)時,圖24所示之主電腦1a10將患者資料傳送至移動終端機1a0A(圖25所示之步驟1b08)。於在圖25所示之步驟1b07中,不存在患者候補之情形(no)時,有時亦進行新患者登錄,或再次進行檢索,但省略再次檢索之常式顯示,而僅表示進行新患者登錄之步驟(圖25所示之步驟1b09)。When the patient candidate is present in the step 1b07 shown in Fig. 25, the host computer 1a10 shown in Fig. 24 transmits the patient data to the mobile terminal 1a0A (step 1b08 shown in Fig. 25). In the case 1b07 shown in FIG. 25, when there is no patient candidate (no), a new patient registration may be performed or the search may be performed again, but the routine display of the re-search is omitted, and only the new patient is performed. The step of logging in (step 1b09 shown in Fig. 25).

於新患者登錄之情形時,當操作輸入手段1a06之小鍵盤,輸入資料時,小鍵盤輸入係直接傳遞至主電腦1a10,並登錄於記錄手段1a11之資料庫中。再者,於新患者之登錄之情形時,除來自輸入手段1a06之輸入以外,亦可為來自主電腦1a10之輸入,於來自任一者之輸入中,均新追加於記錄於主電腦1a10之記錄手段1a11之患者資訊(圖25所示之步驟1b09)。When the new patient is logged in, when the keypad of the input means 1a06 is operated and the data is input, the keypad input is directly transmitted to the host computer 1a10 and registered in the database of the recording means 1a11. Furthermore, in the case of the registration of the new patient, in addition to the input from the input means 1a06, the input from the host computer 1a10 may be newly added to the input from the host computer 1a10. The patient information of the means 1a11 is recorded (step 1b09 shown in Fig. 25).

若患者既定,且顯示有記錄,則繼而,於圖25所示之步驟1b10中利用移動終端機1a0A之顯示手段1a04進行檢查之項目單顯示。該項目單顯示例示主電腦1a10所輸出顯示之資料、或藉由執行自記錄手段1a07調出該資料之程式之控制手段1a03而顯示手段1a04所顯示者。If the patient is predetermined and a record is displayed, then the item list for inspection by the display means 1a04 of the mobile terminal 1a0A is displayed in step 1b10 shown in FIG. The item list shows the information displayed by the main computer 1a10, or the control means 1a03 for executing the program for calling the data from the recording means 1a07, and the display means 1a04 is displayed.

其亦與檢查項目單相關,於顯示為文本文章之情形時,於自主裝置1a0B,經由無線媒體1a0C、控制手段1a03直接顯示,而具有資料庫固有之排列圖案之顯示之情形時,亦可自儲存手段1a07,讀出應用程式並進行執行(圖25所示之步驟1b10)。It is also related to the inspection item list. When the text item is displayed, the autonomous device 1a0B is directly displayed via the wireless medium 1a0C and the control means 1a03, and when the display pattern of the arrangement pattern inherent to the database is displayed, it may be The storage means 1a07 reads out the application and executes it (step 1b10 shown in Fig. 25).

於圖25中,表示指定牙菌斑檢查之情況,省略除此以外之選擇(1b11a)。In Fig. 25, the case where the plaque inspection is designated is shown, and the other selection (1b11a) is omitted.

若於圖25所示之步驟1b11中指定牙菌斑檢查,則按下輸入手段1a06而所輸入指定之信號係直接傳送至主電腦1a10,主電腦輸出過去之牙菌斑資料。When the plaque inspection is specified in step 1b11 shown in Fig. 25, the input signal 1A06 is pressed and the input signal is directly transmitted to the host computer 1a10, and the host computer outputs the past plaque data.

主電腦1a10自記錄手段1a11調出並向移動終端機1a0A輸出之過去之牙菌斑資料係數值、記號、文字、動畫、靜態影像等資料。The host computer 1a10 recalls the past plaque data coefficient values, symbols, characters, animations, still images, and the like from the recording means 1a11 and outputs them to the mobile terminal 1a0A.

控制手段1a03執行自儲存手段1a07所調出之牙菌斑顯示程式,根據自上述主電腦1a10所輸出之資料進行顯示。The control means 1a03 executes the plaque display program called from the storage means 1a07, and displays it based on the data output from the host computer 1a10.

將藉由移動終端機側之小鍵盤操作於哪個牙號之哪一側面,追加記載哪一階段之牙菌斑之資料傳送至圖24所示之主電腦1a10。Which side of the tooth number is operated by the keypad on the mobile terminal side, and the data of which stage plaque is recorded is transferred to the host computer 1a10 shown in FIG.

主電腦1a10將上述內容之資料記錄於記錄手段1a11中。The host computer 1a10 records the contents of the above contents in the recording means 1a11.

若於圖25所示之步驟1b12中,形成患者牙菌斑之顯示,則向是否進行修正、追加之圖25所示之步驟1b13移動,於進行修正追加之情形時,進行如上所述之修正追加(圖25所示之步驟1b14)。When the display of the patient's plaque is formed in the step 1b12 shown in FIG. 25, it is moved to the step 1b13 shown in FIG. 25 to be corrected or added, and when the correction is added, the correction as described above is performed. Add (step 1b14 shown in Fig. 25).

若修正、追加結束,則於圖25所示之步驟1b15中判斷是否進行其他檢查,於進行其他檢查之情形時,形成圖25所示之步驟1b10之檢查項目單顯示,於不進行其他檢查之情形時,形成是否返回至初始項目單之顯示(圖25所示之步驟1b16),於向初始項目單返回之情形時,進行圖25所示之步驟1b04之患者、使用者選擇項目單顯示,繼續處理。於亦不返回至初始項目單之情形時,例如亦可結束。If the correction or the addition is completed, it is determined whether or not another inspection is performed in step 1b15 shown in FIG. 25, and when the other inspection is performed, the inspection item list shown in step 1b10 shown in FIG. 25 is displayed, and no other inspection is performed. In the case, whether or not to return to the display of the initial item list (step 1b16 shown in FIG. 25) is formed, and in the case of returning to the initial item list, the patient and the user selection item list display of step 1b04 shown in FIG. 25 are performed. Continue processing. For example, when it is not returned to the initial item list, for example, it may be ended.

再者,以上之構成終歸為一例,亦有例如亦可將智能型手機、行動電話直接作為牙科資訊管理用之移動終端機而使用之情形,為至少牙科從事者可攜帶,並可進行輸入、顯示、登錄口腔內資訊、牙科事務資訊、牙科從業者資訊、其他相關之資訊等操作,可視需要自主機終端機讀出資訊,進行登錄,牙科從業者彼此可共有地顯示、輸入所需之資訊即可,可獲得與上述目的相對應之構成者。In addition, the above configuration is exemplified as an example. For example, a smart phone or a mobile phone can be directly used as a mobile terminal for dental information management, and can be carried and input by at least a dental practitioner. Display, log in oral information, dental affairs information, dental practitioner information, other related information, etc., and read information from the host terminal as needed, log in, and the dental practitioners can display and input the required information in common. That is, a constituent corresponding to the above purpose can be obtained.

藉由以上之操作,進行無線通訊係小鍵盤之編碼及數值、文字、符號、記號、文本資料、影像、動畫等資料,由於可即時地顯示,故即便與診療同時地使用終端機,亦可無應力地使用。又,於將主裝置裝著於腰、背之情形或即便於主裝置與移動終端機間有線地連接亦無障礙之情形時等,有時亦可不使用無線通訊,而使用有線通訊。Through the above operations, the encoding of the wireless communication keypad and the numerical values, characters, symbols, symbols, text data, images, animations, etc., can be displayed immediately, so even if the terminal is used simultaneously with the diagnosis and treatment, Use without stress. Further, when the main device is attached to the waist or the back, or when the connection between the main device and the mobile terminal is unobstructed, the wired communication may be used without using wireless communication.

本發明亦可利用上述移動終端機謀求牙科資訊之一元管理。The present invention can also utilize the above mobile terminal device to seek one-party management of dental information.

作為成為管理對象之資訊,可輸入例如由牙科診療之預約管理系統、電子病歷系統、根據會計資訊及診療資訊製成醫療費收費明細表資料之醫療費收費明細表電腦系統、與再來患者相關之恢復管理系統等處理之牙科事務資訊、患者資訊、病歷資訊、會計資訊、診療報酬資訊等,表示例如由具備製成經圖表化之帳單而顯示之功能之經營管理系統處理之牙科事務資訊、數位X光資訊、牙科用顯微鏡資訊、牙科用CT資訊、口腔內攝影機等之檢查資訊、治療用牙科單元資訊、患者用椅子等之資料資訊、牙周袋檢查用探針、來自其他機器之口腔內資訊、牙科醫師、牙科衛生員、牙科工作人員、接待事務工作人員、牙科技工人員等從事者之考勤等牙科從事者資訊,除此以外,如刷牙資訊、牙菌斑相關資訊、牙周病菌資訊等預防資訊、生活習慣疾病相關資訊般,並不限定於口腔內,有時亦包含與牙周病相關之疾病等間接疾病相關之例如血壓、血液資訊等。As information to be managed, for example, a medical management fee schedule computer system for making a medical fee schedule, such as a dental management appointment management system, an electronic medical record system, and accounting information and medical information, may be input, and related to the patient. Dental affairs information, patient information, medical record information, accounting information, medical treatment remuneration information, etc. processed by the recovery management system, etc., indicating dental affairs information processed by, for example, a business management system having a function of displaying a charted bill. , X-ray information, dental microscope information, dental CT information, intraoral camera and other inspection information, therapeutic dental unit information, patient chair information, etc., periodontal bag inspection probe, from other machines Dental information such as oral information, dentists, dental hygienists, dental staff, reception staff, dental technicians, etc., other than dental information, such as brushing information, plaque-related information, periodontal Disease information, such as prevention information, lifestyle-related diseases, and Defining in the mouth, it may also comprise, for example blood pressure, blood indirect information associated with a disease of periodontal disease associated like.

又,若至少為院內有用資訊、患者有用資訊、問診資訊、經營資訊等,則成為一元管理之對象,一元管理不僅為相關之所有牙科醫業資訊之管理,亦有亦可僅將所需之一部分之資訊作為一元管理之對象之情形。In addition, if at least the hospital's useful information, patient information, medical information, business information, etc., it is the subject of one dollar management. The one dollar management is not only for the management of all relevant dental medical information, but also for the required Part of the information is the subject of unary management.

亦有如下之情形:於例如如類比X光攝影裝置之情形般只能利用類比相片、影像獲得資料之情形或手寫資料之情形時,較佳為經由影像掃描器、數位攝影機、電腦畫面之硬拷貝等數位轉換手段轉換為數位信號,而進行管理。There are also cases where, for example, in the case of an analog X-ray device, only analog photos, images, or handwritten data can be used, it is preferably a hard copy via an image scanner, a digital camera, or a computer screen. The equal-digit conversion means converts to a digital signal for management.

資料之一元管理亦可藉由上述移動終端機進行,亦可為利用平板型、筆記型、桌上型電腦型等牙科用電腦之一元管理。One-dimensional management of the data can also be performed by the above-mentioned mobile terminal, or by one of the dental computers such as a tablet type, a notebook type, and a desktop type computer.

尤其,亦可利用以網際網路為中心之上網本規格之終端機、移動終端機,亦可於無線LAN中利用進行網際網路連接之移動終端機。In particular, it is also possible to use an Internet-centric netbook-specific terminal or mobile terminal, or to use a mobile terminal that performs Internet connection in a wireless LAN.

又,本發明亦可進行使用雲端計算方法而一元化之資訊之提供、資訊處理提供等。Moreover, the present invention can also provide information providing information processing, information processing, and the like using a cloud computing method.

例如,移動終端機或主機終端機亦可為對經由網際網路而存在之一至複數之中央手段所提供之應用軟體利用終端機側之專用或通用之瀏覽軟體進行資料之輸入輸出者。終端機側未安裝一元管理用之應用軟體,而僅安裝Internet Explorer(商標)、Firefox(商標)等瀏覽軟體,經由該瀏覽軟體,執行中央之牙科資訊一元管理用軟體,藉此可進行資料之輸入輸出,可不用擔心終端機側之記錄裝置之容量,而成為小型且具有簡易性者。For example, the mobile terminal or the host terminal may also input and output data to and from the application software provided by one or more of the central means via the Internet using the dedicated or general browsing software on the terminal side. The application software for the unary management is not installed on the terminal side, and only the browsing software such as Internet Explorer (trademark) and Firefox (trademark) is installed, and the software for the management of the dental information in the center is executed through the browsing software, thereby enabling the data to be used. The input and output can be made compact and simple without worrying about the capacity of the recording device on the terminal side.

再者,亦可不使用通用瀏覽器,而使用牙科資訊一元管理用軟體啟動專用之軟體。Furthermore, it is also possible to use a software for the dental information management software to start a dedicated software without using a general-purpose browser.

再者,亦有終端機側將資訊全部儲存於雲端側之資源中之情形或個人資訊等需要安全管理之一部分資訊儲存於終端機側之情形。In addition, there are cases where the terminal side stores all of the information in the resources on the cloud side or personal information, and some information that requires security management is stored on the terminal side.

關於雲端之態樣,作為例如資訊之洩漏成為問題之範圍僅為公司內、中央手段或參加之牙科團體內之私有雲,所構築之系統較佳,若確實安全,則亦可由藉由外部之利用電腦之資訊提供服務手段等而構築之公有雲所構成,亦可視情形,全部設為私有雲或公有雲。Regarding the state of the cloud, as a leak of information, for example, is only a private cloud within the company, central means or participating dental groups, the system constructed is better, and if it is safe, it can also be externally The public cloud is constructed by using the information provided by the computer, and it can be set as a private cloud or a public cloud depending on the situation.

關於該移動終端機,除牙科醫師以外,牙科衛生員、牙科接待事務工作人員、牙科技工人員、其他相關者、有時患者亦可分別攜帶使用。亦可與其他工作人員共有資料。又,亦可藉由具備IC卡等識別個人之載體之交換功能,分別交替地使一台專用化而進行使用。Regarding the mobile terminal, in addition to the dentist, the dental hygienist, the dental reception staff, the dental technician, other related persons, and sometimes the patient may also carry it separately. It can also share information with other staff members. Further, by using an exchange function of a carrier that recognizes an individual such as an IC card, it is also possible to use one of them alternately.

資料之一元管理較佳為於由各系統處理之資料間存在相容性,但並非必需相容性,例如,亦有於使用畫面之硬拷貝資料之情形時等,至少顯示於移動終端機上,可進行操作即可之情形。Preferably, one of the data management is compatible between the data processed by each system, but is not necessarily compatible, for example, when using hard copy data of the screen, etc., at least on the mobile terminal. It can be operated.

於本實施例中,較佳為於設定外部資料庫之伺服器與移動終端機可通訊之狀態下即時地使用,但並不限定於此,亦可使用操作暫時記錄於移動終端機中,於與伺服器之通訊成為可能之時間點,暫時記錄之資料自動地傳輸至資料庫之分批方法。In this embodiment, it is preferable to use the server in which the external database is set to communicate with the mobile terminal, but the present invention is not limited thereto, and the operation may be temporarily recorded in the mobile terminal. The time when the communication with the server becomes possible, the temporarily recorded data is automatically transferred to the batch method of the database.

例如,亦可為如下者:於在移動終端機上操作患者之預約系統之情形時,當決定用於患者之治療、預防之門診治療計劃表時,若自終端機上,輸入成為候補之預約日期,則自資料庫,讀出預約狀況資料,並進行比較,將重複之預定日期顯示於移動終端機之畫面上,而促進變更,藉由於移動終端機畫面之輸入顯示欄將計劃表記入於複數之治療、預防畫面,且自移動終端機進行印字命令,亦可藉由相關之印表機印字印刷治療、預防計劃表,而散發給患者。For example, when the patient's reservation system is operated on the mobile terminal, when the outpatient treatment plan for the treatment and prevention of the patient is determined, if the appointment is made from the terminal, the reservation becomes an alternate candidate. The date is read from the database, and the reservation status data is read and compared, and the repeated scheduled date is displayed on the screen of the mobile terminal, and the change is promoted, and the schedule is recorded in the input display column of the mobile terminal screen. A plurality of treatment and prevention screens, and printing commands from the mobile terminal, can also be distributed to the patient by printing a treatment and prevention schedule with a related printer.

移動終端機係與主裝置無線、有線地連接,除此以外,亦可與口腔內攝影機有線或無線地連接,於該情形時,可使需要治療、預防之齒、牙周之攝影定位合格。The mobile terminal system is connected to the main device wirelessly and by wire, and can be connected to the intraoral camera in a wired or wireless manner. In this case, the positioning of the teeth and the periodontal requiring treatment and prevention can be qualified.

於不僅謀求移動終端機與主機終端機間之資訊之一元化,亦針對每一所謂之牙科診療用椅子,設置終端機作為牙科用電腦之情形時,若將主機終端機使用為伺服器,則謀求主機終端機與各個椅子之電腦間之資訊之一元管理。In the case where a terminal device is used as a dental computer for each so-called dental clinic chair, the terminal device is used as a server for the dental device, and the host terminal is used as a server. One of the information management between the host terminal and the computer of each chair.

向移動終端機之資料之輸入係於除如上所述,使所附設之模具、滑動模具、手指、筆及其他者接觸畫面而進行操作之類型之操作按鈕、旋轉撥盤以外,亦連接畫面上之虛擬按鈕、虛擬鍵盤、口腔內攝影機等周邊機器之情形時,例示周邊機器上之上述按鈕、撥盤,除此以外,藉由具備利用一體地設置之麥克風之聲頻輸入記錄、利用一體或分開地設置之攝影機之掃描記錄功能,自由輸入變得容易。再者,掃描記錄功能亦可藉由牙科用攝影機設為相片影像記錄。The input to the data of the mobile terminal is connected to the operation button and the rotary dial of the type in which the attached mold, the sliding mold, the finger, the pen, and the like are operated in contact with the screen as described above, and is also connected to the screen. In the case of a peripheral device such as a virtual button, a virtual keyboard, or an intraoral camera, the above-described buttons and dials on the peripheral device are exemplified, and the audio input recording using the integrally provided microphone is utilized, and the use is integrated or separated. The scan recording function of the camera set in the ground makes it easy to freely input. Furthermore, the scan recording function can also be set as a photo image recording by a dental camera.

於平板型電腦、移動終端機等進行根據畫面輸入時之電磁感應式筆、電阻膜式筆之利用之文字、手寫影像之輸入之情形時,亦可獲取手寫輸入資料。Handwriting input data can also be obtained when a tablet computer, a mobile terminal, or the like is used to input an image of an electromagnetic induction pen, a resistive film pen, or a handwritten image when the screen is input.

例如,於對患者進行說明之情形,對牙科衛生員說明治療方法之情形及其他情形時,手寫地顯示於畫面適合之情形時,當自移動終端機手寫地輸入畫面時,亦可藉由直接進行顯示,或同步地顯示於主機終端機之螢幕畫面,進行對患者之說明、對其他從業者之說明,亦可直接進行記錄,而於之後使用。For example, in the case of explaining the patient, when the dental hygienist explains the treatment method and other situations, when the gesture is displayed on the screen, when the screen is handwritten from the mobile terminal, it can also be directly Display or synchronously display on the screen of the host terminal, explain the patient, explain to other practitioners, or record directly, and use it later.

尤其於手寫地輸入於口腔內影像之情形時,可直接作為患者之資料而進行使用。Especially when the image is input by hand in the mouth, it can be used directly as the patient's data.

進而,為了亦可輸入聲頻資料,亦可準確掌握口腔內狀況。Furthermore, in order to input audio data, it is also possible to accurately grasp the condition in the mouth.

聲頻資料亦可為例如於在移動終端機畫面上,與其他移動終端機使用者進行對話之情形時,藉由指定窗口,而同時顯示聲頻與影像者。The audio data may be, for example, when a conversation is made with other mobile terminal users on the mobile terminal screen, and the audio and video are simultaneously displayed by specifying a window.

又,聲頻資料係直接轉換為文字資料,手寫文字亦轉換為文字資料,藉此可降低記錄容量。尤其於進行口腔內之診斷之情形時,於蛀牙之狀態下等,預先將專業用語作為聲頻資料而登錄,並藉由與經由移動終端機而輸入之聲頻之比較對照,轉換為文字資料,藉此可自動地使至目前為止所寫下之資料為電子化資料。Moreover, the audio data is directly converted into text data, and the handwritten text is also converted into text data, thereby reducing the recording capacity. In particular, when performing intraoral diagnosis, in the state of fangs, the professional term is registered as audio data in advance, and converted into text data by comparison with the audio input via the mobile terminal. This automatically makes the information written so far into electronic data.

將預先登錄之專業用語之聲頻樣本與文本資料之表記錄於記錄裝置,比較所輸入之聲頻資料與聲頻樣本資料,並轉換為與一致或大致一致之情形時之聲頻樣本資料對應之文本資料,藉此可進行確切之牙科資訊記錄。Recording the audio sample and the text data of the pre-registered professional term on the recording device, comparing the input audio data and the audio sample data, and converting the text data corresponding to the audio sample data in the case of a consistent or substantially identical situation, This allows for accurate dental information recording.

本實施例亦可於一元管理下,進行電子病歷等患者資訊之輸入或診療報酬資訊之輸入等與牙科事務相關之資訊之輸入輸出,於該情形時,主機終端機與移動終端機亦可至少於輸入狀態下同步。即,若自主機終端機輸入,則上述輸入顯示於移動終端機,輸出顯示亦同樣地同步進行。畫面同步軟體係於移動終端機內置通用電腦之情形時,可利用市售之軟體Sync+(商品名)等而進行。又,移動終端機表示有連接預先內置之或具備LAN功能之USB終端機而可利用無線LAN之狀態者等。其不僅謀求主機終端機與移動終端機間之共有,亦謀求經由主機終端機而與其他移動終端機之間之共有或於主機終端機間直接之共有。直接之共有係除使用電磁波、紅外線等無線媒體者以外,亦可為經由中繼終端機者。In this embodiment, the input and output of information relating to dental affairs, such as the input of patient information such as an electronic medical record or the input of medical and medical remuneration information, can be performed under the one-man management. In this case, the host terminal and the mobile terminal can also be at least Synchronize in the input state. That is, when input from the host terminal, the input is displayed on the mobile terminal, and the output display is also synchronized in the same manner. In the case where the mobile terminal has a built-in general-purpose computer, the screen synchronization soft system can be performed using a commercially available software Sync+ (trade name) or the like. Further, the mobile terminal device indicates that a state in which a wireless LAN is available by connecting a USB terminal having a LAN function or a LAN function is provided. It not only seeks to share the host terminal and the mobile terminal, but also seeks to share it with other mobile terminals via the host terminal or directly with the host terminal. The direct sharing system may be a wireless communication medium such as electromagnetic waves or infrared rays, or may be a terminal that passes through the relay terminal.

於在家牙科般之情形時,於移動終端機之儲存容量、處理能力較低,而無法儲存資料之情形時,亦可藉由其他儲存裝置或郵件等,將無法儲存之部分整理為資料,使用專用或公共線路向主機終端機逐步或針對每一固定之儲存量而傳送。In the case of dental conditions at home, when the storage capacity and processing capacity of the mobile terminal are low and the data cannot be stored, the unstorable parts can be sorted into materials by other storage devices or mails. The dedicated or public line is transmitted to the host terminal step by step or for each fixed amount of storage.

如上所述之終端機間之顯示之同步係於例如共通之室內進行牙科診療時,自移動終端機上進行複雜之輸入需要時間,因此藉由使得能夠進行來自裝備有鍵盤、滑鼠等輸入介面之主機終端機之輸入,而可進行迅速之輸入。When the synchronization between the display of the terminals described above is performed in, for example, a common indoor dental treatment, it takes time to perform complicated input from the mobile terminal, so that an input interface equipped with a keyboard, a mouse, and the like can be enabled. The input of the host terminal can be quickly input.

又,亦可於使用移動終端機、其他終端機之牙科資訊之一元管理中,進行時間系列之資料之自動處理。例如,自資料庫讀出治療後之患者之治療結束、治療停止時之日期,與現在之日期進行對照,於治療後,經過預先設定之相當期間時,將上述內容顯示於移動終端機或主機終端機。或者,亦可自動地進行直接印字製成直接郵遞廣告。Moreover, the automatic processing of the time series data can also be performed in one of the dental information management using the mobile terminal and other terminal devices. For example, the date when the treatment of the patient after the treatment is read out from the database is completed, and the date when the treatment is stopped is compared with the current date, and after the treatment, the content is displayed on the mobile terminal or the host after a predetermined period of time is set. Terminal. Alternatively, direct printing can be automatically made into a direct mail advertisement.

主機終端機亦可於診療報酬製成之時期到來時自動地通知移動終端機,對於考勤,亦可自動地通知無報告之日期等,而進行調整。The host terminal can also automatically notify the mobile terminal when the period of the medical payment is made, and can also automatically adjust the date of the report without waiting for the attendance.

移動終端機係與X光攝影裝置、口腔內攝影機、顯微鏡等周邊機器直接或經由主機終端機而連接,藉此亦可獲得即時地將例如利用該等周邊機器之攝影輸出顯示於移動終端機,並向由患者名等既定之患者用資料保持器記錄之構成。亦可自移動終端機進行該等周邊機器或牙科用椅子、照明器具等之動作之控制。此時,亦可將控制操作之記錄作為日誌記錄於患者病歷。The mobile terminal system is connected to a peripheral device such as an X-ray imaging device, an intra-oral camera, or a microscope directly or via a host terminal device, thereby obtaining an instant display of the photographic output using the peripheral devices, for example, on the mobile terminal. And it is composed of a data holder recorded by a predetermined patient such as a patient name. The operation of these peripheral devices, dental chairs, lighting fixtures, and the like can also be controlled from the mobile terminal. At this time, the record of the control operation can also be recorded as a log on the patient's medical record.

患者用資料檔案夾較佳為以主機終端機為中心,於不重複之狀態下記錄,且可藉由來自各終端機之檢索而讀出。患者用資料檔案夾係於暫時使用時,亦可針對每一終端機存在等而存在複數個,於持續登錄時,較佳為存在於一個儲存區域中。亦有該儲存區域不僅處於主機終端機,亦可處於經由網路之遠程之情形。The patient data folder is preferably centered on the host terminal, recorded in a state of non-repetition, and can be read by retrieval from each terminal. When the patient data folder is used for temporary use, there may be a plurality of files for each terminal, etc., and in the case of continuous login, it is preferably present in one storage area. There are also storage areas that are not only in the host terminal but also in the remote location via the network.

進而,該移動終端機亦可進行與患者之利用聲頻、影像、文字之資訊交換,尤其於謀求移動終端機之通用化之情形時,患者亦可攜帶該移動終端機。於患者攜帶之情形時,較佳為設為僅可閱覽患者所需之資訊。亦有如下之情形:其係於例如對智能型手機、其他行動電話之應用軟體進行上述之牙科用管理終端機化之情形時,僅藉由使患者亦安裝專用之應用程式即成為可能。Furthermore, the mobile terminal can also exchange information using audio, video, and text with the patient, and particularly when the mobile terminal is used for generalization, the patient can carry the mobile terminal. In the case of a patient carrying, it is preferable to set only the information required for the patient to be viewed. There is also a case where, for example, in the case of performing the above-described dental management terminal for a smart phone or other mobile phone application software, it is possible to install a dedicated application only by the patient.

tooth 科用說明手段Explanatory means

本實施例係對牙科診療,將例如患者之全景狀所有齒列影像、治療部位影像顯示於電腦之螢幕(顯示器)畫面,並且根據目的使進行細分化而形成之動畫結合並作為結合動畫而再生,藉此可於對每一患者進行治療之說明時,可進行容易明白之說明者。牙科醫師亦可使用預先結合有經細分化之動畫之既成動畫行,亦可事先選擇而進行編輯結合。In the present embodiment, for the dental treatment, for example, all the dentition images and the treatment site images of the patient's panoramic view are displayed on the screen (monitor) screen of the computer, and the animation formed by subdividing according to the purpose is combined and reproduced as a combined animation. In this way, it is possible to make an easy-to-understand explanation when describing each patient. The dentist can also use an established animation line that is pre-combined with a subdivided animation, or can be edited and combined in advance.

牙科醫師事先進行選擇編輯之方法係選擇使用半定製地或既存地結合之動畫行者,進而,組合所有說明資料,參照圖26對製作至少一個動畫行之實施例進行詳細說明。The method of selecting and editing by the dentist in advance selects to use a semi-custom or existing combination of animation walkers, and then combines all the explanatory materials, and an embodiment for producing at least one animation line will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

圖26係用以說明牙科醫師事先設定為一個組合動畫之情形時之動作之圖。Fig. 26 is a view for explaining the action of the dentist when it is set in advance as a combined animation.

1c01係最初之項目單之顯示。顯示表示既成動畫行之清單、可半定製地結合編輯之清單、各個經細分化之動畫之清單,並根據目的進行選擇。1c01 is the display of the original project list. A list of established animation lines, a list of semi-customizable edits, and a list of each subdivided animation are displayed and selected according to the purpose.

1c02係自最初之項目單顯示中選擇哪一個之步驟。1c02 is the step of selecting which one of the initial item list displays.

1c03係於因選擇哪一個而執行步驟產生分歧之步驟中,於NO之情形時,經由端子1c03a向其他結合動畫選擇(未圖示)移動。於YES之情形時,向藉由附加於動畫名檢索或細分化動畫資料之固有之符號之組合之檢索等方法判斷是否已登錄於該結合動畫之步驟(1c04)移動,假設於登錄之情形(yes)時,經由端子1c03a,向其他結合動畫選擇轉移。1c03 is a step in which a step is performed by selecting which one is selected, and in the case of NO, it is moved to another combined animation selection (not shown) via the terminal 1c03a. In the case of YES, it is judged whether or not the step of registering the combined animation (1c04) is moved to a method of searching by a combination of symbols unique to the animation name search or subdivided animation data, and it is assumed that the login is performed ( When yes), the transition is selected to other combined animation via terminal 1c03a.

於未登錄之情形時,顯示細分化資料之一覽表,進而顯示編輯區域。細分化資料之一覽表亦可根據目的不同,而進行區分,亦可進行系列化、樹之形成。When not logged in, a list of the subdivided data is displayed, and the editing area is displayed. The list of subdivided data can also be differentiated according to the purpose, and can also be serialized and formed.

於細分化動畫資料之選擇1c05中,自一覽表,利用拷貝黏貼、拖放向編輯區域移動,編輯時間系列之說明資料。In the selection of the segmentation animation data 1c05, from the list, use the copy paste, drag and drop to move to the editing area, edit the description of the time series.

於圖26中,於細分化動畫選擇結束時(1c06),試驗地進行進行選擇而結合之動畫行之再生(1c07)。In Fig. 26, at the end of the subdivided animation selection (1c06), the reproduction of the animation line combined with the selection is performed experimentally (1c07).

圖27係表示結合動畫之組合例者。Fig. 27 is a view showing a combination of examples of combined animations.

1d01係拔牙後之齒齦之恢復動畫,1d02係鄰齒之傾斜動畫,1d03係對咬牙之延伸動畫,1d04係橋基牙之形成動畫,25係圖1所示之加工物之說明動畫,1d06係表示加工物之組裝之動畫。1d01 is the recovery animation of the gums after tooth extraction, 1d02 is the tilting animation of the adjacent teeth, 1d03 is the extension animation of the teeth, the animation of the 1d04 bridge base, and the animation of the workpiece shown in Figure 25, 1d06 An animation showing the assembly of the workpiece.

亦有該等各個動畫並非一個而存在複數之動畫較佳之情形。There are also cases where the animations are not one and there are multiple animations.

將該1d01至1d06之一連串動畫作為結合動畫1d00,起名字並記錄於記錄裝置中,或記錄裝置記錄對各個細分化動畫資料預先附加之記號行後,結合動畫1d00亦可於電腦畫面上,顯示為一個圖示。The serial animation of 1d01 to 1d06 is used as the combined animation 1d00, and the name is recorded in the recording device, or the recording device records the symbol line pre-attached to each of the subdivided animation data, and the animation 1d00 can also be displayed on the computer screen. As an illustration.

該結合動畫1d00係按順序進行組合並連續而製成可再生之一個動畫者,各個動畫經細分化,較佳為對各者設定有患者用常數、醫師用常數。各個動畫之形式係例如WMV、api、MPEG形式,藉由既成之動畫編輯軟體進行選擇並按順序結合即可。The combined animation 1d00 is sequentially combined and continuously made into a reproducible one animator, and each animation is subdivided, and it is preferable to set a patient constant and a physician constant for each. The form of each animation is, for example, WMV, api, and MPEG format, and is selected by the existing animation editing software and combined in order.

進而,於步驟1c08中,顯示醫師側資料、患者側資料,進行時間成本之顯示,較佳為其他方法,即亦可按情形進行更低成本、短時間、高利益之說明之顯示。Further, in step 1c08, the physician side data and the patient side data are displayed, and the time cost is displayed. Preferably, other methods are used, that is, the display of the description of the lower cost, the shorter time, and the high benefit can be performed according to the situation.

步驟1c09係於即便在已製成結合動畫之狀態下亦欲重新選擇之情形時,向細分化動畫資料之選擇轉移之步驟,1c10係選擇是否保存該項目單清單之步驟,於保存之情形(yes)時,於步驟1c11中輸入結合動畫名並登錄保存。Step 1c09 is a step of selecting a transfer to the subdivided animation data even when the image is to be reselected in the state of being combined with the animation, and 1c10 is a step of selecting whether to save the list of the project list, in the case of saving ( When yes), enter the combined animation name in step 1c11 and log in to save.

於未保存情形時,於結束步驟中恢復原狀,選擇進行編輯或直接結束(1c12)。In the unsaved situation, return to the original state in the end step, select to edit or directly end (1c12).

圖26係說明醫師製成結合動畫時之動作者,由於實際經細分化之資料存在多數,故產生根據選擇之資料而需要時間之情形,因此亦可預先針對每一說明類型將樣品形成為編輯框。Fig. 26 is a diagram showing the actor who made the combined animation by the physician. Since there is a large number of actually subdivided data, it takes time to select the data according to the selected data, so the sample can be formed into an edit for each description type in advance. frame.

亦有如下之情形:該實施例進而亦可將患者自身之口腔內影像登錄於細分化動畫,亦可作為患者特有之治療、預防等說明之一部分而進行利用。There are also cases in which the patient's own intra-oral image can be registered in a segmented animation, or can be utilized as part of a patient-specific treatment, prevention, and the like.

本實施例主要利用於知情同意書中,較佳為就對患者之治療時間之縮短化或說明之效率化而言,可進行更高效率之視聽,於上述情形時,進行細分化,醫師一面對患者說明時間為數秒至數分之動畫,一面進行執行,藉此藉由於醫師使用之用語之解說方面為輔助之畫面顯示,對患者而言,成為容易明白之說明。The present embodiment is mainly used in the informed consent form, and it is preferable to perform more efficient viewing and listening for the shortening of the treatment time of the patient or the efficiency of the explanation. In the above case, the segmentation is performed, and the physician In the face of the patient's description of the animation, which is a few seconds to a few minutes, the execution is performed, and the explanation of the use of the terms used by the physician is an auxiliary screen display, which is easy for the patient to understand.

例如,利用圖示、表等將經細分化之資料之清單顯示於電腦畫面上,並分別附加患者容易明白之簡明之標題。For example, a list of the subdivided materials is displayed on a computer screen using icons, tables, and the like, and a concise title that is easy for the patient to understand is attached.

於上述之移動終端機上顯示該清單之編輯,而牙科醫師進行選擇。將所選擇之狀態顯示於患者觀察之畫面上。The edit of the list is displayed on the mobile terminal described above, and the dentist makes a selection. The selected state is displayed on the screen observed by the patient.

又,亦可一面與患者商量治療,一面簡易地於移動終端機上,製成患者用之經動畫選擇之組合動畫行,而進行將其顯示為患者用之即刻之形成。Further, it is also possible to form a combined animation line selected by the user for the animation on the mobile terminal while discussing the treatment with the patient, and to display it as a patient.

即,主要由具備牙科從業者攜帶之顯示部與輸入介面之移動終端機及具備患者、期待預防者(視為患者等)可進行視聽之顯示用螢幕之終端機所構成,牙科從業者於移動終端機上,檢索並編輯包含向患者等傳遞之內容之動畫、經細分化之動畫或其組合動畫。於編輯結束之狀態下,向患者視聽用終端機傳送。In other words, it is mainly composed of a mobile terminal including a display unit and an input interface carried by a dental practitioner, and a terminal for displaying a screen for viewing and displaying a patient, a preventive person (as a patient, etc.), and the dental practitioner is moving. On the terminal, an animation, a subdivided animation, or a combination thereof containing the content delivered to the patient or the like is retrieved and edited. At the end of the editing, the terminal is transmitted to the patient's audiovisual terminal.

再者,於該情形時,亦可傳送動畫資料,亦可為如下者:傳送附加於動畫資料中之識別資料,患者視聽用之終端機接收該識別資料,進行將根據該識別資料行之動畫顯示於畫面上之即時處理。Furthermore, in this case, the animation data may also be transmitted, or may be: transmitting the identification data attached to the animation data, and the terminal device for the patient's audio-visual receiving the identification data, and performing an animation according to the identification data. Instant processing displayed on the screen.

進而,亦可為如下者:於牙科醫師等攜帶有移動終端機之狀態下,進行患者等進行視聽之終端機之畫面顯示上之動畫之再生、停止、患者資料之顯示、非顯示等遠程操作。Further, in a state in which a mobile terminal is carried by a dentist or the like, a remote operation such as reproduction, stop, display of patient data, and non-display on an image display of a terminal for viewing by a patient or the like is performed. .

又,亦可於牙科從業者攜帶之移動終端機上同步顯示患者進行視聽之影像、資料。尤其,於利用圖1所示之口腔內攝影機,顯示患者之口腔內並進行說明之情形時,說明與病例一致,而變得更加容易明白。Moreover, the images and materials for viewing and viewing by the patient can be simultaneously displayed on the mobile terminal carried by the dental practitioner. In particular, when the intraoral camera shown in Fig. 1 is used to display the inside of the patient's mouth and the description is made, it is explained that it is consistent with the case, and it becomes easier to understand.

進而,於本實施例中,亦可利用圖24所示之移動終端機,進行動畫資料之編輯,並輸出顯示編輯於患者可看到之電腦螢幕中之影像。Furthermore, in the present embodiment, the mobile terminal device shown in FIG. 24 can also be used to edit the animation data, and output the image displayed on the computer screen that can be seen by the patient.

又,亦可藉由該移動終端機,進行對於連接於患者可看到之牙科用電腦之螢幕之動畫顯示之操作。Moreover, the operation of displaying the animation of the screen connected to the dental computer visible to the patient can be performed by the mobile terminal.

齒齦與齒之邊界檢測手段Boundary and tooth boundary detection means

本發明包含用以可明確地設定檢測齒與齒齦之邊界之構成。The present invention includes a configuration for clearly setting the boundary between the detecting tooth and the gum.

口腔內攝影機之影像係因於黑暗且狹窄之空間一面進行照明一面進行攝影之部位較多,故有時於例如作為形成圖8、圖10所示之利用電腦影像處理之全景影像之手段,檢測影像間之共通部分之情形或對患者進行牙科治療之說明之情形時等,齒齦與齒之邊界等因近似之色調或唾液之影響等,而難以識別。The image of the intraoral camera is often photographed while being illuminated in a dark and narrow space. Therefore, it may be detected as a means for forming a panoramic image processed by computer image as shown in FIG. 8 and FIG. 10, for example. When the common portion between the images is used or when the patient is subjected to dental treatment, the boundary between the gums and the teeth is difficult to recognize due to the influence of the approximate color tone or saliva.

因此,藉由由抽取實體影像之牙齒之輪廓之輪廓抽取手段、與將實體影像轉換為成分色而使齒及齒齦之形狀明確之色成分影像轉換手段、合成由上述色成分影像轉換手段轉換之影像與輪廓抽取影像之合成影像形成手段所構成之組合構成,即便於齒之污垢或照明不充分之場所亦可抽取齒與齒齦之輪廓。Therefore, by the contour extraction means for extracting the contour of the tooth of the solid image, and the color component image conversion means for converting the solid image into the component color to form the shape of the tooth and the gum, the composite is converted by the color component image conversion means. The combination of the image and the synthetic image forming means of the contour extracted image can extract the contour of the tooth and the gum even in the place where the dirt or the illumination of the tooth is insufficient.

輪廓抽取手段係由例如對影像進行二維傅立葉變換之手段、及於該傅立葉轉換後,僅檢測表示影像之濃淡變化之頻率區域中之相位信號而進行反傅立葉轉換之手段所構成,除此以外,有時亦可利用Z轉換系統、拉普拉斯轉換系統。The contour extracting means is configured by, for example, means for performing two-dimensional Fourier transform on the image, and means for performing inverse Fourier transform by detecting only the phase signal in the frequency region indicating the change in the shading of the image after the Fourier transform. Sometimes, Z conversion system and Laplace conversion system can also be utilized.

色成分影像轉換手段係形成分解為由例如RGB表色系統、La*b*表色系統、HSV表色系統、XYZ表色系統、xyY表色系統、L*u*v*表色系統、蒙賽爾表色系統、奧斯華德表色系統、NCS(Natural Color System)、DIN表色系統等表色系統所示之成分色之影像,自其中選擇可明確地看到形狀之成分色,並形成根據上述成分色之影像之手段、或不論表色系統均合成上述成分色,形成可更明確地看到形狀之成分色並形成根據該成分色之影像之手段。該選擇較佳為預先測定並決定適於口腔內影像之成分色,表示例如組合La*b*表色系統之L成分影像、a*成分影像、或b*成分影像之任一個與HSV表色系統之H(色相(Hue))成分影像、S(色彩度(Saturation‧Chroma,飽和色度))成分影像、V(亮度(Brightness‧Lightness‧Value))成分影像之任一個而進行合成,有不同之表色系統之成分色彼此之合成較佳之情形。成分色之選擇或組合合成為向可明確地看到形狀之成分色之轉換或進行複數成分色之合成者即可。再者,成分影像係指包含將加強成分之影像調整為例如表示程式上之成分值之數值而獲得者等。The color component image conversion means is decomposed into, for example, an RGB color system, a La*b* color system, an HSV color system, an XYZ color system, an xyY color system, an L*u*v* color system, and a Mongolian color system. The image of the color of the color shown in the color system of the Xaar color system, Oswald color system, NCS (Natural Color System), DIN color system, etc., from which you can clearly see the color of the shape, Further, a means for forming an image based on the above-described component color or a component color of the color system is formed, thereby forming a component color which can more clearly see the shape and forming an image based on the component color. Preferably, the selection is a pre-measurement and determination of a component color suitable for intra-oral imaging, and indicates, for example, combining one of the L component image, the a* component image, or the b* component image of the La*b* color system with the HSV color. The system combines H (hue) component image, S (color saturation (Saturation ‧ Chroma)) component image, and V (brightness ‧ Lightness ‧ value component image) The case where the composition colors of different color systems are better combined with each other. The selection or combination of the component colors may be combined into a conversion to a component color in which the shape can be clearly seen or a combination of a plurality of component colors. In addition, the component image refers to a person who has obtained an image in which the image of the reinforcing component is adjusted to, for example, a value indicating a component value on a program.

又,除選擇可明確地辨別形狀之成分影像以外,使用人可進一步辨別上述邊界之顏色之組合而進行著色。表示例如將R(紅色)成分影像應用於齒齦,將G(綠色)成分影像應用於齒。Further, in addition to selecting a component image in which the shape can be clearly distinguished, the user can further distinguish the color of the boundary to perform coloring. This means, for example, that the R (red) component image is applied to the gums, and the G (green) component image is applied to the teeth.

又,此處所示之成分色不僅指自影像中進行檢測所得者,亦有亦可使用使邊界明確之顏色而重新著色之情形。Further, the component colors shown here are not only those obtained by detecting from the image, but also by re-coloring the color with a clear boundary.

繼而,合成影像形成手段係對由上述輪廓抽取手段所獲得之輪廓影像與由色成分影像轉換手段所獲得之影像,例如如色彩鍵方法般,將輪廓影像之輪廓部分以外設為同色系,穿透色成分影像等而進行合成。又,於該合成後,為了進一步加強色成分影像,亦可使用人欲進一步目視或機械地區別邊界而將齒齦部變為紅色系或更濃地加強,將齒變為綠色或更濃地加強之手段。再者,若存在根據色成分,將齒齦顏色轉換為紅色,將齒顏色轉換為綠色者,則亦可轉換為上述色成分影像。該等手段較佳為均藉由電腦軟體而實現,亦有藉由閘陣列、PLD(Programmable Logic Device,可程式邏輯裝置)等定製、半定製IC而構成之情形。Then, the synthetic image forming means sets the contour image obtained by the contour extracting means and the image obtained by the color component image converting means, for example, as the color key method, and sets the contour portion of the contour image to the same color system. The composition is synthesized by a translucent component image or the like. Further, after the synthesis, in order to further enhance the color component image, it is also possible to use a person to further visually or mechanically distinguish the boundary to make the gum portion red or thicker, and to strengthen the teeth to green or more densely. Means. Furthermore, if there is a color component that converts the gum color to red and the tooth color to green, it can also be converted into the above-described color component image. Preferably, the means are implemented by a computer software, or a custom or semi-custom IC such as a gate array or a PLD (Programmable Logic Device).

繼而,對圖29所示之實施例進行說明。Next, an embodiment shown in Fig. 29 will be described.

2901係影像輸入手段,為輸入例如由口腔內攝影機所攝影之靜態影像之手段。由影像輸入手段所輸入之靜態影像影像係輸出至濾波器手段2902。2902係濾波器手段,表示不模糊濾波器等邊緣加強濾波器,除此以外,有時亦可使用加強影像之濃淡之濾波器。The 2901 is an image input means for inputting a still image captured by, for example, an intraoral camera. The still video image input by the image input means is output to the filter means 2902. The 2902 filter means an edge enhancement filter such as an unblurred filter, and in addition, it is also possible to use a gradation filter for enhancing the image. Device.

利用濾波器手段2902進行濾波處理之影像係輸出至輪廓抽取手段2903及成分色影像轉換手段2903。The image subjected to the filtering process by the filter means 2902 is output to the contour extracting means 2903 and the component color image converting means 2903.

2903係輪廓抽取手段,由二維傅立葉變換手段、相位信號檢測手段、及反傅立葉變換手段所構成,該等手段例示組合存在於如open-CV(Intel公司製造)般之軟體庫中之程式模組並進行執行者。The 2903-based contour extracting means is composed of a two-dimensional Fourier transform means, a phase signal detecting means, and an inverse Fourier transform means, and these means exemplify a program model which is combined in a software library such as open-CV (manufactured by Intel Corporation). Group and perform the performers.

2904係成分色影像轉換手段,如上所述,由形成轉換為La*b*表色系統、HSV表色系統之a*成分色或b*成分色、H成分色S成分色V成分色之影像之手段及合成該等成分色之成分色合成手段所構成,色調發生變化,形成齒及齒齦之形狀明確之影像。進而,有時根據該色調之變化,亦可發現齒之污垢、蛀牙。The 2904-based component color image conversion means, as described above, forms an image which is converted into a La*b* color system, an a* component color or a b* component color, and an H component color S component color V component color of the HSV color system. The means and the component color synthesis means for synthesizing the component colors, the color tone is changed, and the shape of the tooth and the gum is clearly defined. Further, depending on the change in the color tone, dirt and tooth decay of the teeth may be found.

由輪廓抽取手段2903所獲得之輪廓影像與由成分色影像轉換手段2904轉換為成分色影像之影像係輸出至合成顯示手段2905。The contour image obtained by the contour extracting means 2903 and the image converted by the component color image converting means 2904 into the component color image are output to the composite display means 2905.

2905係合成顯示手段,合成輪廓抽取手段2903輸出之輪廓影像與成分色影像轉換手段之輸出成分色影像。該合成係例如使輪廓影像之輪廓以外同系色化,使該同系色透明化,並與成為背景映像之成分色影像合成者。所合成之影像係顯示於電腦螢幕上。The 2905 is a composite display means, and the contour image output by the synthetic contour extracting means 2903 and the output component color image of the component color image converting means are synthesized. For example, the composition is colored in the same color as the outline of the contour image, and the same color is made transparent, and is combined with the component color image that becomes the background image. The synthesized image is displayed on a computer screen.

有時藉由該等一連串之合成處理可獲得齒齦與齒之邊界清晰之影像。又,以圖12所示之左右之齒列為合成標記ML大致到達影像之中心之影像彼此(例如影像906e與影像1101c)時之基準,檢測例如中心之2個齒之邊界KL時,本實施例係較佳地使用。又,亦可直接合成藉由傅立葉變換檢測相位信號而獲得之輪廓影像與實體影像。又,即便僅使用成分色影像亦可獲得形狀變得明確之影像,因此即便僅利用由成分色影像檢測手段所獲得之影像亦可獲得齒齦與齒之邊界變得明確之影像。如上所述之齒與齒齦之邊界變得明確之影像可利用為各種合成作業用之標記,或用以對患者進行說明、用於牙科治療。Occasionally, a series of synthetic processes can be used to obtain a clear image of the boundary between the gums and the teeth. Further, when the left and right tooth rows shown in FIG. 12 are the reference when the composite mark ML reaches the center of the image (for example, the image 906e and the image 1101c), and the boundary KL of the center of the two teeth is detected, for example, the present embodiment Examples are preferably used. Moreover, the contour image and the solid image obtained by detecting the phase signal by Fourier transform can be directly synthesized. Further, even if only the component color image is used, an image having a clear shape can be obtained. Therefore, even if only the image obtained by the component color image detecting means is used, an image in which the boundary between the gum and the tooth becomes clear can be obtained. The image of the boundary between the tooth and the gum as described above can be used as a marker for various synthetic operations, or used to describe the patient for dental treatment.

[產業上之可利用性][Industrial availability]

本發明係為了謀求牙科診療中之口腔內健全化,而提出一種可藉由以容易觀察之形式將口腔內資訊提供給患者,而更新患者之口腔內資訊之牙科系統者,有效地利用於牙科醫療領域中。In order to improve the oral cavity in dental treatment, the present invention provides a dental system that can update the patient's oral information by providing oral information to the patient in an easily observable form, and effectively utilizes the dental system. In the medical field.

11...口腔內影像攝影手段11. . . Oral imaging

12...診療部位檢測手段12. . . Medical site detection means

13、53...單位影像形成手段13,53. . . Unit image forming means

14、55...診療順序設定手段14, 55. . . Medical treatment order setting means

15、56...診療說明形成手段15, 56. . . Medical treatment instructions

16、57...顯示輸出手段16,57. . . Display output means

17、58、156...記錄手段17, 58, 156. . . Means of recording

20...上顎20. . . Captain

21、22、23、24、74~77、707~710...單位影像21, 22, 23, 24, 74-77, 707-710. . . Unit image

21a、22a、23a...順序欄21a, 22a, 23a. . . Sequence bar

21b、22b、23b...診療開始日期欄21b, 22b, 23b. . . Medical treatment start date column

21c、22c、23c、24c...說明欄21c, 22c, 23c, 24c. . . Description bar

24d...診療部位24d. . . Treatment site

31、B7005...攝影手段31, B7005. . . Photography means

32...影像修整手段32. . . Image conditioning

33...影像顯示手段33. . . Image display means

34...位置檢測手段34. . . Position detection

51...廣範圍影像輸入手段51. . . Wide range of image input means

52...牙齒檢測手段52. . . Tooth detection

54...診療影像選擇手段54. . . Diagnosis and treatment image selection means

71~73、AH1、b101、b102...齒71~73, AH1, b101, b102. . . tooth

79...齒資料79. . . Tooth data

151...患者資料庫調出手段151. . . Patient database transfer means

152...最短診療日期檢索手段152. . . Shortest diagnosis date retrieval method

153...最短診療日期顯示手段153. . . Shortest treatment date display means

154...空閒診療日期顯示手段154. . . Idle medical treatment date display means

155...決定輸入手段155. . . Decide on the means of input

301、A21、B9101...握持用殼體301, A21, B9101. . . Grip housing

302、310、318、903、A10、A22...反射鏡單元302, 310, 318, 903, A10, A22. . . Mirror unit

303...平面鏡303. . . Plane mirror

304、B9114...導線304, B9114. . . wire

305...圓筒部305. . . Cylinder

306、307...操作按鈕306, 307. . . Operation button

308...凸面鏡308. . . Convex mirror

309...攝影機單元309. . . Camera unit

311...凹面鏡311. . . concave mirror

312...照明用元件312. . . Lighting component

313...攝影機313. . . camera

314...電腦314. . . computer

78、314A...螢幕78, 314A. . . Screen

315...鍵盤315. . . keyboard

316...電腦用之滑鼠316. . . Computer mouse

317...印表機317. . . Printer

600...下顎600. . . Squat

601~612...攝影面601~612. . . Photographic surface

613~615...共通部分影像613-615. . . Common partial image

700、711、1702a...影像資料700, 711, 1702a. . . video material

701~703...齒影像701~703. . . Tooth image

704~706...顯示欄704-706. . . Display bar

900a...齒列900a. . . Tooth column

901...口腔內攝影機901. . . Intraoral camera

A10K、A22H、902、B9108、B9112...反射鏡A10K, A22H, 902, B9108, B9112. . . Reflector

904...本體904. . . Ontology

A14、A23、905、B9106...攝影單元A14, A23, 905, B9106. . . Photography unit

1401...攝影資料輸入部1401. . . Photographic data input department

1402...校正手段1402. . . Correction means

1403...共通點檢測手段1403. . . Common point detection means

1404...世界座標轉換手段1404. . . World coordinate conversion means

1405...三維影像形成手段1405. . . Three-dimensional image forming means

1406、B7009、B8017、1a04...顯示手段1406, B7009, B8017, 1a04. . . Display means

1500...探針1500. . . Probe

1501...攝像部A1501. . . Camera A

1501a...透鏡1501a. . . lens

1502...攝像部B1502. . . Camera unit B

1503...照明光照射部1503. . . Illumination light irradiation unit

1504...光導路徑1504. . . Light guide path

1505...發光手段1505. . . Luminous means

1506...支承構件1506. . . Support member

1507...操作用開關1507. . . Operation switch

1508...握持部1508. . . Grip

1509、B9103...電導線1509, B9103. . . Electric wire

1701a、1701b、1702b、1701c、1702c...影像1701a, 1701b, 1702b, 1701c, 1702c. . . image

1703b、1703c...共通範圍1703b, 1703c. . . Common range

A16a、A16b...操作用按鈕A16a, A16b. . . Operation button

A10S、A22S...裝著部A10S, A22S. . . Mounting department

A11...殼體A11. . . case

A12...觀察方向A12. . . Observation direction

A13...照準光照射面A13. . . Illuminate the illuminated surface

A14L...照準光光程A14L. . . Sighting

A15、A26...纜線A15, A26. . . Cable

A24...電路基板A24. . . Circuit substrate

A25a、A25b...位置感測器A25a, A25b. . . Position sensor

A141、A142...照明用光源A141, A142. . . Lighting source

A143...攝影構件A143. . . Photography component

A421、A422...x軸A421, A422. . . X axis

A431、A432...y軸A431, A432. . . Y-axis

A441、A442...z軸A441, A442. . . Z axis

A451、A452...重力加速度向量A451, A452. . . Gravity acceleration vector

b103...重複影像B103. . . Repeated image

b104...上顎資料B104. . . Upload information

b105...下顎資料B105. . . Download information

b106...上顎X光資料B106. . . Shangyu X-ray data

b107...下顎X光資料B107. . . Lower X-ray data

b201...全齒X光影像B201. . . Full-tooth X-ray image

b202...實體影像B202. . . Physical image

b203、b204、b205...合成影像B203, b204, b205. . . Synthetic image

b210、b217...前齒用之牙冠B210, b217. . . Crown for front teeth

b211、b218...間隙彌補部B211, b218. . . Gap compensation

b212...牙橋用之植入物B212. . . Implant for dental bridge

b213...人造牙根B213. . . Artificial root

b214、b216...牙橋上部構造B214, b216. . . Upper bridge structure

b219、b215...上部構造B219, b215. . . Upper structure

b219a、b219b...臼齒缺損部B219a, b219b. . . Caries defect

b219c...前齒之缺損部B219c. . . Defect of the front teeth

b219d...前齒之間隙B219d. . . Front tooth gap

1b05a、1c03a...端子1b05a, 1c03a. . . Terminal

B7001...輸入手段B7001. . . Input means

B7002...輸入次數檢測手段B7002. . . Input number detection means

B7003...延遲手段B7003. . . Delay means

B7004...攝影輸出設定手段B7004. . . Photography output setting means

B7006、2901...影像輸入手段B7006, 2901. . . Image input means

B7007...影像選定手段B7007. . . Image selection means

B7008...保存顯示手段B7008. . . Save display means

B8011...X光影像攝影手段B8011. . . X-ray imaging

B8012...實體影像攝影手段B8012. . . Physical imaging

B8013...比較部位抽取手段B8013. . . Comparison site extraction

B8014...比較部位抽取手段B8014. . . Comparison site extraction

B8015...比較手段B8015. . . Comparison means

B8016...一致部記錄手段B8016. . . Consistent recording method

B8022...虛擬形狀等儲存手段B8022. . . Virtual shape and other storage means

B8018、B8020...虛擬形狀調整手段B8018, B8020. . . Virtual shape adjustment

B8019、B8021、2905...合成顯示手段B8019, B8021, 2905. . . Synthetic display means

B9102...X光輸出裝置B9102. . . X-ray output device

B9104...X光用螢光體B9104. . . X-ray phosphor

B9105、B9111...可見光穿透構件B9105, B9111. . . Visible light penetrating member

B9107、B9110...X光攝影用支承構件B9107, B9110. . . Support member for X-ray photography

B9113...X光感測器B9113. . . X-ray sensor

1a01...小型電池1a01. . . Small battery

1a02...升壓手段1a02. . . Boosting means

1a03...控制手段1a03. . . Control means

1a05...終端機側通訊手段1a05. . . Terminal side communication means

1a06...輸入手段1a06. . . Input means

1a07、1a11...儲存手段1a07, 1a11. . . Storage means

1a08...電性線路1a08. . . Electrical line

1a09...通訊手段1a09. . . Communication means

1a10...主電腦1a10. . . Main computer

1a12...通訊網路1a12. . . Communication network

1a13...其他主裝置1a13. . . Other main device

1a0A...移動終端機1a0A. . . Mobile terminal

1a0B...主裝置1a0B. . . Main device

1a0C...無線媒體1a0C. . . Wireless media

1d00...結合動畫1d00. . . Combine animation

1d01...拔牙後之齒齦之恢復動畫1d01. . . Recovery animation of the gums after tooth extraction

1d02...鄰齒之傾斜動畫1d02. . . Tilting animation of adjacent teeth

1d03...對咬牙之延伸動畫1d03. . . Extended animation of the teeth

1d04...橋基牙之形成動畫1d04. . . Animation of bridge abutment

2902...濾波器手段2902. . . Filter means

2903...輪廓抽取手段2903. . . Contour extraction

2904...成分色影像轉換手段2904. . . Component color image conversion means

RM...輪廓RM. . . profile

ML...標記ML. . . mark

IG...修正用顯示部IG. . . Correction display unit

CL...垂直中央線CL. . . Vertical center line

HL...水平中央線HL. . . Horizontal center line

KL...邊界KL. . . boundary

1b01~1b16...步驟1b01~1b16. . . step

圖1係表示本發明之一實施例之圖。BRIEF DESCRIPTION OF THE DRAWINGS Figure 1 is a diagram showing an embodiment of the present invention.

圖2係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 2 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖3係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 3 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖4係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 4 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖5係表示本發明之另一實施例之圖。Fig. 5 is a view showing another embodiment of the present invention.

圖6係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 6 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖7係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 7 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖8係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 8 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖9係表示本發明之一實施例之圖。Figure 9 is a diagram showing an embodiment of the present invention.

圖10係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 10 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖11係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 11 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖12係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 12 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖13係表示本發明之另一實施例之圖。Figure 13 is a view showing another embodiment of the present invention.

圖14係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 14 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖15係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 15 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖16係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 16 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖17係用以說明實施例之圖。Figure 17 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment.

圖18係表示本發明之一實施例之圖。Figure 18 is a diagram showing an embodiment of the present invention.

圖19係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 19 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖20係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 20 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖21係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 21 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖22係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 22 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖23係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 23 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖24係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 24 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖25係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 25 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖26係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 26 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖27係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 27 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖28係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 28 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

圖29係用以說明本發明之實施例之圖。Figure 29 is a diagram for explaining an embodiment of the present invention.

11...口腔內影像攝影手段11. . . Oral imaging

12...診療部位檢測手段12. . . Medical site detection means

13...單位影像形成手段13. . . Unit image forming means

14...診療順序設定手段14. . . Medical treatment order setting means

15...診療說明形成手段15. . . Medical treatment instructions

16...顯示輸出手段16. . . Display output means

17...記錄手段17. . . Means of recording

151...患者資料庫調出手段151. . . Patient database transfer means

152...最短診療日期檢索手段152. . . Shortest diagnosis date retrieval method

153...最短診療日期顯示手段153. . . Shortest treatment date display means

154...空閒診療日期顯示手段154. . . Idle medical treatment date display means

155...決定輸入手段155. . . Decide on the means of input

156...記錄手段156. . . Means of recording

Claims (7)

一種口腔內攝影顯示系統,係具備:連攝影像列形成手段,其對齒列之一側面及另一側面進行連攝攝影而形成複數之連攝影像列;側面齒列影像形成手段,其用以將該連攝攝影之該齒列之該一側面之影像及該另一側面之影像進行合成,該連攝攝影之該齒列之該一側面之影像及該另一側面之影像係藉由該連攝影像列形成手段形成一影像分別對該連攝攝影之該齒列之該一側面之影像及該另一側面之影像共通,以分別形成該齒列之該一側面及該另一側面之部分齒列影像;以及側面齒列影像合成手段,其根據由該側面齒列影像形成手段分別形成之對該複數之部分齒列影像共通之影像進行連結合成該齒列之該一側面及該另一側面之部分齒列影像而形成整體之齒列影像。 An intraoral photographic display system comprising: a photographic image forming means for performing continuous shooting on one side and the other side of a dentition to form a plurality of photographic image sequences; and a side dentition image forming means for using Combining the image of the one side of the dentition and the image of the other side of the photographic lens, the image of the side of the dentition of the photographic lens and the image of the other side are The photographic image forming means forms an image for common to the image of the side of the dentition of the photographic camera and the image of the other side to form the side and the other side of the dentition respectively And a side dentition image synthesizing means for combining the image common to the plurality of dentition images formed by the side dentition image forming means to synthesize the side of the dentition and the side A portion of the dentition image on the other side forms an overall dentition image. 如申請專利範圍第1項之口腔內攝影顯示系統,其具備:標記設定手段,其於齒列上之既定位置設定攝影影像上可識別之標記;連攝影像列形成手段,其對齒列之一側面及另一側面形成連攝影像列;側面齒列影像形成手段,其分別對該一側面之連攝影像列及該另一側面之連攝影像列,自標記到達既定位置之影像進行合成,藉此分別形成一側面齒列影像及另一側面 齒列影像;以及側面齒列影像合成手段,其根據該標記位於既定位置之靜態影像中之齒列上之特徵部位連結合成該一側面齒列影像與該另一側面齒列影像。 The intraoral photography display system according to claim 1, comprising: a marker setting means for setting a mark identifiable on the photographic image at a predetermined position on the tooth row; and a photographic image forming means for the dentition One side and the other side form a continuous image sequence; the side tooth row image forming means respectively synthesizes the image line of the one side and the connected image line of the other side from the mark to the image of the predetermined position Thereby forming a side dentition image and the other side And a side dentition image synthesizing means for combining the one side dentition image and the other side dentition image according to the characteristic part of the dentition in the static image of the mark at the predetermined position. 如申請專利範圍第1項之口腔內攝影顯示系統,其具有:X光影像顯示手段,其顯示與該側面齒列影像對應之牙齒之X光影像;及虛擬齒列顯示手段,其顯示與該側面齒列影像對應之牙齒之虛擬矯正或虛擬審美著色之齒列。 The intraoral photography display system of claim 1, comprising: an X-ray image display means for displaying an X-ray image of the tooth corresponding to the side dentition image; and a virtual dentition display means for displaying The dentition of the virtual or virtual aesthetic coloration of the tooth corresponding to the side dentition image. 如申請專利範圍第1項之口腔內攝影顯示系統,其中包含:齒列顯示手段,其顯示利用該側面齒列影像合成手段所獲得之齒列影像;單位影像化手段,其針對每一診療改善單位將口腔內影像化;設定手段,其對由該單位影像化手段進行單位影像化所得之影像,設定診療改善順序資訊;顯示手段,其根據診療改善順序資訊以可一覽地顯示之方式顯示附加有該診療改善順序資訊之影像;及顯示媒體,其顯示記錄有利用該顯示手段所獲得之顯示資訊。 The intraoral photography display system of claim 1, comprising: a dentition display means for displaying a dentition image obtained by the side dentition image synthesis means; and a unit imaging means for each diagnosis improvement The unit visualizes the oral cavity; the setting means sets the medical treatment improvement order information for the image obtained by unit imaging by the unit imaging means; and the display means displays the additional information in a manner that can be displayed in a list according to the medical treatment improvement order information There is an image of the medical treatment improvement order information; and a display medium whose display shows the display information obtained by using the display means. 如申請專利範圍第1項之口腔內攝影顯示系統,其具備小型且可攜帶之資料處理終端機,該資料處理終端機具 有:輸入部,其可輸入且調整與牙科醫業相關之資料;通訊手段,其可與外部資料處理終端機及進行出勤管理或牙科診療管理之伺服器進行資料通訊;及顯示手段,其顯示由該側面齒列影像合成手段所合成之齒列影像及與該牙科醫業相關之資料。 For example, the intraoral photography display system of claim 1 has a small and portable data processing terminal, and the data processing terminal tool There is an input unit, which can input and adjust information related to the dental medical industry; and a communication means, which can communicate with an external data processing terminal and a server for performing attendance management or dental treatment management; and display means, display thereof The dentition image synthesized by the side dentition image synthesizing means and the data related to the dental medical industry. 如申請專利範圍第1項之口腔內攝影顯示系統,其具有牙科治療說明用資料形成手段,該牙科治療說明用資料形成手段儲存形成為預先製成之細分化牙科治療所得之動畫之細分化動畫資料並儲存於儲存手段中,自該儲存手段中選擇該細分化動畫資料並進行連結連接,藉此形成牙科治療說明用資料並以該顯示手段進行顯示。 The intraoral photography display system of claim 1, which has a dental treatment instruction data forming means for storing a subdivided animation of an animation obtained by pre-made subdivided dental treatment by means of data forming means. The data is stored in the storage means, and the subdivided animation data is selected from the storage means and connected, thereby forming a dental treatment instruction material and displaying the information by the display means. 如申請專利範圍第1項之口腔內攝影顯示系統,其包含將該口腔內影像化之手持型之攝影手段、以及對該攝影手段照射指示攝影部位之照明光之照射手段。 An intraoral imaging system according to the first aspect of the invention is characterized in that it comprises a hand-held imaging means for imaging the oral cavity, and means for irradiating the imaging means with illumination light indicating the imaging site.
TW100147322A 2011-01-11 2011-12-20 Intraocular photography display system TWI524873B (en)

Applications Claiming Priority (4)

Application Number Priority Date Filing Date Title
JP2011015764 2011-01-11
JP2011017192A JP2012143528A (en) 2011-01-12 2011-01-12 Oral imaging and display system
JP2011020197 2011-01-13
JP2011144612A JP2013012062A (en) 2011-06-29 2011-06-29 Dentistry information management system

Publications (2)

Publication Number Publication Date
TW201236636A TW201236636A (en) 2012-09-16
TWI524873B true TWI524873B (en) 2016-03-11

Family

ID=47222882

Family Applications (1)

Application Number Title Priority Date Filing Date
TW100147322A TWI524873B (en) 2011-01-11 2011-12-20 Intraocular photography display system

Country Status (1)

Country Link
TW (1) TWI524873B (en)

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI691933B (en) * 2017-08-25 2020-04-21 大陸商北京奇禹科技有限公司 Image processing method and device

Families Citing this family (3)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI556798B (en) * 2014-05-27 2016-11-11 Metal Ind Res & Dev Ct The method of establishing three - dimensional image of tooth
TWI735088B (en) * 2019-11-27 2021-08-01 財團法人金屬工業研究發展中心 Mobile device for detecting oral pathology
CN116563474B (en) * 2023-07-05 2023-09-19 有方(合肥)医疗科技有限公司 Oral cavity panorama generating method and device

Cited By (1)

* Cited by examiner, † Cited by third party
Publication number Priority date Publication date Assignee Title
TWI691933B (en) * 2017-08-25 2020-04-21 大陸商北京奇禹科技有限公司 Image processing method and device

Also Published As

Publication number Publication date
TW201236636A (en) 2012-09-16

Similar Documents

Publication Publication Date Title
CA2824665C (en) Intraoral video camera and display system
US11163976B2 (en) Navigating among images of an object in 3D space
US10667887B2 (en) Video-assisted margin marking for dental models
US9262864B2 (en) Synchronized views of video data and three-dimensional model data
JP6099310B2 (en) Automatic dental chart creation method using digital images
JP2012157683A (en) Dental treatment system
US11759091B2 (en) Device for visualizing an interior of a patient's mouth
EP2678830B1 (en) Hybrid stitching for 3d reconstruction
TWI728374B (en) Method, system, computer device and storage medium of virtual editing of teeth
JP2005000631A (en) Dental oral cavity colorimetry photographic system
TWI524873B (en) Intraocular photography display system
JP2012143528A (en) Oral imaging and display system
RU2610911C1 (en) System and method of virtual smile prototyping based on tactile computer device
Product uide
US20240122463A1 (en) Image quality assessment and multi mode dynamic camera for dental images
Dunn et al. The Associate Editor/Change With the Leaves Impressions/Dentists Find Ways to Balance Life, Career Dr. Bob/The Lazy Way to a Healthy Life

Legal Events

Date Code Title Description
MM4A Annulment or lapse of patent due to non-payment of fees